Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual

THERMOSET FRP
DUCT CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS’

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC.
THERMOSET FRP
DUCT CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL
FIRST EDITION -- JUNE, 1997

4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-- 1209
THERMOSET FRP
DUCT CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL
COPYRIGHTE1997
All Rights Reserved
by

4201 Lafayette Center Drive

Chantilly, VA 20151--1209
Printed in the U.S.A.
FIRST EDITION -- JUNE, 1997

Second Printing -- February, 2002
Except as allowed in the Notice to Users and in certain licensing contracts, no part of this book may be
reproduced, stored in a retrievable system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
FOREWORD
The selection of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) duct for use in corrosive environments is increasing. FRP duct is
frequently being selected for fume hood exhaust systems, for air pollution and odor control systems in facilities such
as waste water treatment plants, and other corrosive environments.
FRP ducts are routinely designed and manufactured to meet a systems unique requirements. This represents a major
advantage over thermoplastic (PVC), metallic, and coated metallic ductwork. FRP ducts are manufactured using spe-
cifically designed reinforcement systems, bonded together with thermosetting plastic resins. These resins are selected
for their ability to resist specific chemicals known to be present in the corrosive environment in which the ductwork
is to be installed.
Working with resin and FRP duct manufacturers, SMACNA contractors have researched the current and future poten-
tial use of FRP duct and its physical properties. This effort resulted in an authoritative manual that SMACNA contrac-
tors, architects, engineers, managers, and plant owners can rely upon for the proper selection, manufacture, and instal-
lation of specifically tailored FRP duct systems. To establish these manufacturing and construction standards,
SMACNA contracted with Dr. Joseph M. Plecnik of the Civil Engineering Department at California State University,
Long Beach, to develop and test duct design procedures for the manufacture and installation of round and rectangular
duct systems. Dr. Plecnik investigated round duct systems ranging from 4 to 72 inches (100 to 1800 mm) in diameter
and rectangular duct systems ranging from 12 to 96 inches (300 to 2400 mm) in width and depth, operating at a static
pressure within a range from -30 to +30 in. wg (-7500 to +7500 Pa) and within a temperature range from ambient to
180_F (82ºC).
By following the manufacturing, construction, and installation details specified in this manual, a contractor should
be able to develop a duct system that dependably meets the stated requirements of the customer. As with all products,
there are limits to the successful use of FRP duct systems. It is imperative that the customer provide an accurate defini-
tion of the corrosive environment in which the FRP duct system is to be installed. Proper selection of the thermoset
resins and reinforcing material ensures that the customer receives a well designed duct system that meets his needs
for the foreseeable future.
Throughout the manual and its appendices, we have included the engineering design criteria and safety factors selected
to achieve a safe, and cost effective construction standard. This includes ample consideration of the manufacturing
variables that occur in a product built to meet the individual requirements of each application.
SMACNA is indebted to representatives from thermoset resin and FRP duct manufacturers, and the SMACNA con-
tractors who, as members of the FRP Task Force, volunteered their time and effort to the development of this manual.
SMACNA appreciates their dedication and willingness to share their knowledge and experience in the design, fabrica-
tion, and installation of FRP duct systems.

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition iii

FRP TASK FORCE
Michael J. Daugharty, Chairman Norman T. R. Heathorn
Heating & Plumbing Engineers Inc. N.V. Heathorn, Inc.
Colorado Springs, CO Oakland, CA
Joseph J. Flannagan, Jr. G. A. Navas, Staff

Primary Plastics, Inc. SMACNA, Inc.
Endwell, NY Chantilly, VA
CONSULTANTS
Dr. Frank A. Cassis Joseph M. Plecnik, PhD, P.E.

Ashland Chemical, Inc. Cal State University, L.B.
Los Angeles, CA Long Beach, CA
Robert M. Hahn Robert C. Talbot

Xerxes Corporation Technical Writer
Avon, OH West Worthington, OH
Le Rodenberg
Industry Consultant
Escondido, CA
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition iv

NOTICE TO USERS
OF THIS PUBLICATION
1. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
a) The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (“SMACNA”) provides its product for informational pur-
poses.
b) The product contains “Data” which is believed by SMACNA to be accurate and correct but the data, including all information, ideas
and expressions therein, is provided strictly “AS IS”, with all faults. SMACNA makes no warranty either express or implied regarding
the Data and SMACNA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
c) By using the data contained in the product user accepts the Data “AS IS” and assumes all risk of loss, harm or injury that may result
from its use. User acknowledges that the Data is complex, subject to faults and requires verification by competent professionals, and that
modification of parts of the Data by user may impact the results or other parts of the Data.
d) IN NO EVENT SHALL SMACNA BE LIABLE TO USER, OR ANY OTHER PERSON, FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, OUT OF OR RELATED TO USER’S USE OF SMAC-
NA’S PRODUCT OR MODIFICATION OF DATA THEREIN. This limitation of liability applies even if SMACNA has been advised
of the possibility of such damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL SMACNA’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY USER
FOR ACCESS TO SMACNA’S PRODUCT OR $1,000.00, WHICHEVER IS GREATER, REGARDLESS OF LEGAL THEORY.
e) User by its use of SMACNA’s product acknowledges and accepts the foregoing limitation of liability and disclaimer of warranty and
agrees to indemnify and hold harmless SMACNA from and against all injuries, claims, loss or damage arising, directly or indirectly, out
of user’s access to or use of SMACNA’s product or the Data contained therein.
2. ACCEPTANCE
This document or publication is prepared for voluntary acceptance and use within the limitations of application defined herein, and
otherwise as those adopting it or applying it deem appropriate. It is not a safety standard. Its application for a specific project is contingent
on a designer or other authority defining a specific use. SMACNA has no power or authority to police or enforce compliance with the
contents of this document or publication and it has no role in any representations by other parties that specific components are, in fact, in
compliance with it.
3. AMENDMENTS
The Association may, from time to time, issue formal interpretations or interim amendments, which can be of significance between
successive editions.
4. PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS
SMACNA encourages technological development in the interest of improving the industry for the public benefit. SMACNA does not,
however, endorse individual manufacturers or products.
5. FORMAL INTERPRETATION
a) A formal interpretation of the literal text herein or the intent of the technical committee or task force associated with the document or
publication is obtainable only on the basis of written petition, addressed to the Technical Resources Department and sent to the Associa-
tion’s national office in Chantilly, Virginia. In the event that the petitioner has a substantive disagreement with the interpretation, an
appeal may be filed with the Technical Resources Committee, which has technical oversight responsibility. The request must pertain to a
specifically identified portion of the document that does not involve published text which provides the requested information. In consid-
ering such requests, the Association will not review or judge products or components as being in compliance with the document or publi-
cation. Oral and written interpretations otherwise obtained from anyone affiliated with the Association are unofficial. This procedure
does not prevent any committee or task force chairman, member of the committee or task force, or staff liaison from expressing an opin-
ion on a provision within the document, provided that such person clearly states that the opinion is personal and does not represent an
official act of the Association in any way, and it should not be relied on as such. The Board of Directors of SMACNA shall have final
authority for interpretation of this standard with such rules or procedures as they may adopt for processing same.
b) SMACNA disclaims any liability for any personal injury, property damage, or other damage of any nature whatsoever, whether spe-
cial, indirect, consequential or compensatory, direct or indirectly resulting from the publication, use of, or reliance upon this document.
SMACNA makes no guaranty or warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein.
6. APPLICATION
a) Any standards contained in this publication were developed using reliable engineering principles and research plus consultation with,
and information obtained from, manufacturers, users, testing laboratories, and others having specialized experience. They are subject to
revision as further experience and investigation may show is necessary or desirable. Construction and products which comply with these
Standards will not necessarily be acceptable if, when examined and tested, they are found to have other features which impair the result
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition v

contemplated by these requirements. The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association and other contributors
assume no responsibility and accept no liability for the application of the principles or techniques contained in this publication. Authori-
ties considering adoption of any standards contained herein should review all federal, state, local, and contract regulations applicable to
specific installations.
b) In issuing and making this document available, SMACNA is not undertaking to render professional or other services for or on behalf
of any person or entity. SMACNA is not undertaking to perform any duty owed to any person or entity to someone else. Any person or
organization using this document should rely on his, her or its own judgement or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent profes-
sional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstance.
7. REPRINT PERMISSION
Non-exclusive, royalty-free permission is granted to government and private sector specifying authorities to reproduce only any
construction details found herein in their specifications and contract drawings prepared for receipt of bids on new construction and reno-
vation work within the United States and its territories, provided that the material copied is unaltered in substance and that the reproducer
assumes all liability for the specific application, including errors in reproduction.
8. THE SMACNA LOGO
The SMACNA logo is registered as a membership identification mark. The Association prescribes acceptable use of the logo and ex-
pressly forbids the use of it to represent anything other than possession of membership. Possession of membership and use of the logo in
no way constitutes or reflects SMACNA approval of any product, method, or component. Furthermore, compliance of any such item
with standards published or recognized by SMACNA is not indicated by presence of the logo.
vi Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
FRP TASK FORCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CONSULTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
NOTICE TO USERS OF THIS PUBLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

1.1 SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.2 USES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.3 WHAT IS FRP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.4 PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.5 CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
CHAPTER 2 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1

2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2.2 THERMOSET RESINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2.3 MIXING AND CURING THERMOSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
2.4 CATALYSTS, PROMOTERS, INHIBITORS, AND OTHER ADDITIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
2.5 MATERIALS HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2.6 FLAME RETARDANCE AND SMOKE GENERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2.7 ULTRAVIOLET STABILIZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
2.8 TYPES OF REINFORCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
CHAPTER 3 LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1

3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.2 CORROSION BARRIER RESIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.3 CORROSION BARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.4 STRUCTURAL LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.5 EXTERIOR SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.6 POTENTIAL ADHESION PROBLEMS DURING LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . 3.3
3.7 WALL THICKNESS TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.8 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.9 SURFACE HARDNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.10 APPEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
CHAPTER 4 FIELD JOINING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1

4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.2 PREPARATION FOR JOINING DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition vii

4.3 PREPARATION OF STRAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.4 MIXING RESIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
4.5 JOINING DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
4.6 INTERNAL JOINT LAMINATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
4.7 CLEAN–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
CHAPTER 5 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1

5.1 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCTS USING TYPES I AND II LAMINATES . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.2 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCTS USING FILAMENT WOUND
(TYPE X) LAMINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
CHAPTER 6 DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR FRP DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1

6.1 DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR FRP DUCTS USING TYPE I AND II LAMINATES . . . . 6.1
6.2 SELECTION OF STIFFENERS AND FLANGES FOR RECTANGULAR DUCT
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
CHAPTER 7 REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1

7.1 TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.2 CONTACT MOLDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.3 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.4 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.5 STATIC ELECTRICITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.6 REINFORCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.7 RAW EDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.8 JOINTS (WELDS OR BONDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.9 LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.11 OVERLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.12 RECTANGULAR DUCT CORNERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.13 BOND CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.14 FLANGE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.15 STANDARD ELBOWS AND MITERED JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
7.16 FITTING CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
7.17 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
7.18 FUME HOODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
7.19 DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
7.20 ACCESS OPENINGS AND END CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
7.21 DRAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
7.22 VENTILATOR HEADS AND LOUVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
7.23 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
viii Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

7.24 FLEXIBLE MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
7.25 LINEAR COEFFICIENT OF THERMAL EXPANSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
7.26 TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.27 DRAINAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.28 SPRINKLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.29 BURIED DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.30 MANUFACTURER’S SHOP REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.31 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
7.32 HANDLING, SHIPPING, AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
CHAPTER 8 QUALITY CONTROL AND SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1

8.1 QUALITY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
8.2 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
8.3 HEALTH CONCERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
CHAPTER 9 FRP GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1

9.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9.2 DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9.4 GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT OF THE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1
APPENDIX B CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF FRP DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1
APPENDIX C ALTERNATE ROUND DUCT DESIGN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1
APPENDIX D GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1
APPENDIX E REFERENCED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition ix

TABLES
Table 5--1 Standard Composition of Type I Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Table 5--2 Standard Composition of Type II Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Table 5--3 Minimum Mechanical Properties of Types I and II Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Table 5--4 Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Table 5--4M Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Table 5--5 Minimum Flange Dimensions for Round Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Table 5--6 Filament Wound (Type X) Composite Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Table 5--7 Minimum Mechanical Properties of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Table 5--8 Minimum Bond Construction for Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Table 5--9 Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in in. wg . . . . . . 5.12
Table 5--9M Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in Pa . . . . . . . . . 5.13
Table 6--1 Positive Design Pressure of 10 in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Table 6--1M Positive Design Pressure of 2500 Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Table 6--4 Negative Design Pressure of 10 in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Table 6--4M Negative Design Pressure of 2500 Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Table 6--7 Minimum Flange Dimensions for Rectangular Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Table 6--8 Maximum Allowable Stiffener Span in in. for Positive or Negative Pressure
of 10 in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Table 6--8M Maximum Allowable Stiffener Span in mm for Positive or Negative Pressure
of 2500 Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
of 20 in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
of 5000 Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21
of 30 in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24
of 7500 Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
Table 7--1 Minimum Strap Sizes for Round Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Table 7--2 Weight of FRP Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Table 7--3 Trapeze Angle Support Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
x Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Table 7--4 Hanger Rod (ATR) Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Table 7--5 Minimum Bond Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Table A--1 Nominal Laminate Thickness (in.) Given Duct Diameter and Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.11
Table A--1M Nominal Laminate Thickness (mm) Given Duct Diameter and Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . A.12
Table A--2 Safety Factors Given Filament Wound Laminate Combination and Vacuum . . . . . . . A.13
Table A--2M Safety Factors Given Filament Wound Laminate Combination and Vacuum . . . . . . . A.14
Table A--3 Material Properties For Filament Wound Laminates Model In L–t Coordinates,
Combination S–5 (for Round Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.23
Table A--4 Data for Each Lamina (Theta (Θ) Measured Clockwise from +Y Axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . A.23
Table A--5 Material Properties for Filament Wound Laminates Model In L–t Coordinates,
Combination S–7 (for Round Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.23
Table A--6 Data for Each Lamina (Theta (Θ) Measured Clockwise from +Y Axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . A.24
Table A--7 Average Material Properties for All Rectangular Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.24
Table B--1 Typical Chemical Resistance of Various Resins Used in FRP Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11
Table C--1 Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in in. wg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2
Table C--1M Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in Pa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3
Table C--2 Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in in. wg . . . . . . . C.6
Table C–2M Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in Pa . . . . . . . . . . C.7
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition xi

FIGURES
Figure 2--1 Gel Time vs. Catalyst Concentration at Various Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Figure 3--1 Lay–up Sequence for FRP Duct – Types I, II, and X Laminates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Figure 4--1 Preparation of Strapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Figure 4--2 Application of Strapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Figure 4--3 Butt–and–Strap End–to–End Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Figure 4--4 Bell–and–Spigot Joining Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Figure 4--5 Gel Time vs. Catalyst Concentration at Various Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Figure 5--1 FRP Flange Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Figure 6--1 Corner Reinforcement Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Figure 6--2 Wood Stiffeners with FRP Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Figure 6--3 Construction of Transverse Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
Figure 6--4 Semi–Circular Foam Stiffeners with FRP Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
Figure 6--5 FRP Flange Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Figure 7--1 Trapeze Angle with Hanger Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Figure 7--2 Flange Cant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Figure 7--3 Flange Tolerance Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Figure 7--4 Flange Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Figure 7--5 Flange Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Figure 7--6 Weld Width and Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Figure 7--7 Bolt Tightening Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Figure 7--8 Square Throat Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Figure 7--9 Round or Rectangular Standard Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Figure 7--10 Round or Rectangular Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Figure 7--11 Rectangular Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Figure 7--12 Round or Rectangular Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
Figure 7--13 Transition Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
Figure 7--14 Five Segment Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Figure 7--15 Round / Square Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Figure 7--16 Round or Rectangular Eccentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Figure 7--17 Round Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Figure 7--18 Conical Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
Figure 7--19 Conical Reducing Tees / Lateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
Figure 7--20 Reducing Tees / Lateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Figure 7--21 Conical Laterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Figure 7--22 Tee / Lateral Crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Figure 7--23 Round or Rectangular Wyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
xii Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Figure 7--24 Round or Rectangular Reducing Wyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Figure 7--25 Round or Rectangular Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Figure 7--26 Conical Tee Crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Figure 7--27 Typical Louver Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Figure7--28 Duct Hangers – Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
Figure 7--29 Support for Vertical Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
Figure 7--30 Turning Vane Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
Figure 7--31 Typical Blast Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
Figure 7--32 Typical Butterfly Damper with Locking Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
Figure 7--33 Gravity Back–Draft Damper for Vertical Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
Figure 7--34 Duct Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
Figure 7--35 Typical Stackheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Figure A--1 Cross Section of a 20” x 20” Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.15
Figure A--2 Cross Section of a 36” x 18” Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.15
Figure A--3 Vacuum / Pressure Test of FRP Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.17
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition xiii

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 SCOPE layer of continuous fiber strands wrapped around a ro-

tating mold or mandrel. The reinforcing fiber is im-
This manual covers the physical properties, manufac- pregnated with a catalyzed thermoset polyester or vi-
ture, construction, installation and methods of testing nyl ester. It is then allowed to reach full cure to form
fiberglass reinforced thermosetting plastic duct, in- a hard and dense composite laminate for corrosion ap-
tended for air conveyance in corrosive environments, plications. Once cured (exceeding initial Barcol hard-
as manufactured by hand lay–up, spray–up, and fila- ness), the formed laminates are removed from the
ment winding fabrication techniques. molds and preconditioned for field assembly. At this
point, the fabricated duct sections are inspected and
S Round duct 4 to 72 in. (100 to 1800 mm) di- approved for shipment to the job site.
ameter
1.3.2 Thermoset Plastics
S Rectangular duct 12 to 96 in. (300 to 2400
mm) diameter Thermosetting resins, once fully cured and hardened,
cannot be reverted to their original liquid state. The
S Static pressures –30 to +30 in. wg (–7500 to chemical reaction of thermoset resins is exothermic,
+7500 Pa) where the liquid catalyzed resin heats up and continues
to increase in temperature to form a cured solid resin
S Temperature range ambient to 180ºF (82ºC) state. This is the basic difference between “thermo-
(Depending on resin selection) plastic” and “thermoset plastic.”
While both types of plastics find application through-

1.2 USES
out the air handling industry, the scope of this particu-
lar manual will be confined to air handling systems
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) has been used for
fabricated with thermoset plastic materials.
various types of process equipment, in the chemical,
pulp and paper, power, mining, municipal sewer treat- 1.3.3 FRP Duct Use
ment, and water treatment (odor pollution abatement)
as well as many other associated industries handling The most common use for FRP duct is for corrosion
corrosive environments. control in air pollution and odor abatement ventilation
and exhaust systems. The corrosion resistance of FRP
FRP process equipment of all shapes and sizes, such as depends on the selection of the proper generic type of
columns, scrubbers, hoods, ducts, fans, and stacks as thermosetting resin to handle the corrosive applica-
well as piping, tanks, grating, mist eliminator blades, tion.
heat exchanger shells, tube sheets, and many other
types of equipment are required for severely corrosive Corrosion resistant FRP is generally superior to carbon
applications. steel, galvanized steel, lower grades of stainless steel,
and different types of lined steel equipment.
1.3 WHAT IS FRP?
This manual is primarily directed to the above air han-
FRP stands for “fiberglass reinforced plastic.” FRP is dling systems.
also used to define fiber reinforced plastic (fibers other
than glass). Terms used interchangeably with FRP are The FRP duct industry is a dynamic industry with new
reinforced thermoset plastic (RTP) or glass reinforced products, systems, and procedures evolving on a regu-
plastic (GRP), which is used in Europe and Australia. lar basis. Resins and other products not covered by this
manual are not necessarily inappropriate for use in a
1.3.1 Laminate specific duct system. The contractor must ensure that
the owner, design engineer, resin manufacturer, and
Laminate refers to the “composite material” that is duct manufacturer are all in agreement that the speci-
manufactured from a thermosetting resin matrix with fied FRP duct system will meet the owner’s corrosion
layers of reinforcement fibers. Typical techniques for resistance requirements.
the fabrication of round and rectangular duct are hand
lay–up, spray–up, and filament winding. Hand lay–up 1.4 PURPOSE
and spray–up typically apply layers of chopped strand
and woven fabric to build up structural layers over a This manual proposes to accomplish the following ob-
form or mold. Filament winding applies a structural jectives:
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition 1.1

a. To develop minimum standards for the fab- CHAPTER 6, DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR
rication and installation of FRP duct systems, FRP DUCT
and also as a reference for contract opera-
tions. a. Design of rectangular FRP duct using Type I
and Type II laminates.
b. To develop a source of reference data for de-
sign engineers, industrial engineering depart-
b. Design of stiffeners for rectangular FRP
ments, and pollution control authorities.
ducts using Type II laminates.
c. To provide a responsible source of documen-
tation and terminology for ventilation and air CHAPTER 7, REQUIREMENTS
conditioning equipment, establishing an ac-
curate reference for thermoset plastics as General requirements.
they are used in the sheet metal duct industry.
CHAPTER 8, QUALITY CONTROL AND
1.5 CONTENTS SAFETY
The manual is subdivided into nine chapters and five Quality control requirements, safety, and health con-
appendices, which are briefly described as follows: cerns.
CHAPTER 1, INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 9, FRP GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
The introduction outlines the format and layout of the

Guide specifications for fiberglass reinforced plastic
manual, with a brief description of “FRP” and a sum-
air–handling systems.
mary of the contents of each chapter.
CHAPTER 2, MATERIALS APPENDIX A, DEVELOPMENT OF THE

TABLES
This chapter contains a description of thermoset res-
ins, catalyst and promoter systems required to cure the Complete summary of the criteria used for the estab-
thermoset resins, types of additives used and a brief de- lishment of the FRP Duct Construction Tables and the
scription of reinforcement materials used to fabricate test program that verified the design concepts and the
FRP duct. table data.
CHAPTER 3, LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION APPENDIX B, CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF

FRP DUCT
This chapter outlines the proper lay–up sequence for
corrosion resistant composite laminates for FRP duct Chemical resistance of FRP duct, resin selection
and hood applications in conformance with Tables guide.
M1A–2, M1A–3, and M1A–4 of ASME RTP–1–1995
Edition. These are reprinted in Chapter 5, courtesy of APPENDIX C, ALTERNATE ROUND DUCT
ASME, as Tables 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3, respectively. DESIGN TABLES
CHAPTER 4, FIELD JOINING PROCEDURES Complete set of alternate round duct design tables
based on a higher safety factor (SF = 5.0) than that used
Procedures for joining FRP Duct using the butt–and– for the design tables of Chapter 5 (SF = 4.0).
strap or bell–and–spigot hand lay–up fabrication
methods in the field.
APPENDIX D, GLOSSARY
CHAPTER 5, DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT
Glossary of terms.
a. Design of round (cylindrical) FRP ducts us-
ing Type I and Type II laminates. APPENDIX E, REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
b. Design of round (cylindrical) FRP ducts us- Complete list of documents referenced throughout this
ing Filament Wound (Type X) laminates. manual.
1.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

CHAPTER 2
MATERIALS
CHAPTER 2 MATERIALS
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.2.1 Orthophthalic Resins
Orthophthalic resins are generally referred to as gener-

The use of thermoset FRP ducting to handle corrosive al purpose ortho resins. These ortho resins exhibit lim-
fumes dates back to the 1950’s. These thermoset mate- ited corrosion resistance with poor temperature prop-
rials offer similar corrosion resistance and physical erties (maximum 130_F (54_C)) due to their low heat
strength properties when compared to thermoplastic distortion temperature of the cured resin system.
materials. Both are identified as “plastics.” However,
there is a significant difference during the forming and Brominated versions of ortho resins are available.
fabrication stage of each product. Such systems are used for “mine ventilation FRP
duct,” where ambient conditions are primarily non–
corrosive.
While thermoplastic components are formed using
solid shapes in a manner similar to metallic fabrica-
2.2.2 Isophthalic Resins
tion, the thermoset resins are supplied in liquid form,
which when combined with fiberglass reinforcement, Isophthalic (iso) resins are available in either rigid or
forms a composite laminate, when applied to a rigid resilient versions. They are classified as unsaturated
mold surface. polyesters based on isophthalic acid and glycols of
various types, specifically formulated to exhibit the
Fabricators of FRP composite laminates require spe- corrosion resistance properties desired. Brominated
cial skills and training to handle catalysts (initiators) versions of these isophthalic resins are available for
and promoters in order to understand the chemistry of flame retardant applications. However, these haloge-
room temperature curing systems. nated flame retardant resins require the addition of a
synergist, such as antimony trioxide to achieve Class
I ratings as determined by ASTM E84 test methods.
The catalyzed resin is combined with fiberglass rein- (See section 2.6.)
forcement and laid on a solid form, allowed to cure,
then removed for installation in the field. Following Rigid high molecular weight isophthalic resins are
lay–up techniques, the FRP components are joined to- used for moderate corrosion resistant applications up
gether at the job site using a field wrap of overlapping to a maximum temperature of 180_F (82_C). They are
plies of material. The thickness of the overwrap joint generally used for water, weak acids, and alkalies.
should at least equal the thickness of the duct laminate. They also exhibit good resistance to many solvents and
petroleum products such as gasoline and oil.
Note: When joining Filament Wound (Type X) lami- Resilient isophthalics offer a lesser degree of chemical
nates, a special bond construction is required. (See resistance and should be limited to a maximum tem-
Table 5-8.) perature of 150_F (66_C). However, they are resilient
and less susceptible to stress or impact cracking and
Thermoset laminates do not melt when heated. They are suitable for filament winding. These isophthalic
generally retain their physical strength and integrity at resins are more economical in resin cost when
elevated temperatures. compared to the premium grades of corrosion resistant
thermoset resins.
2.2 THERMOSET RESINS 2.2.3 Chlorendic Resins
Chlorendic resins are unsaturated, halogenated poly-

There are various types of thermoset resins used for ester resins based on het acid (hexachlorocyclopenta-
fabricating FRP duct for corrosion resistant applica- diene) or chlorendic anhydride reacted with a stable
tions. Each of the generic types of resins used today of- glycol–NPG (neopentyl glycol).
fer different properties to be considered when select-
ing a suitable resin for a specific application, e.g., The chlorendic resins are inherently flame retardant,
concentration of chemical environs to be handled and but require 5% by weight of antimony trioxide to
range of temperatures to which the FRP duct will be achieve Class I ratings as determined by ASTM E84
exposed. Any questionable applications should be re- test methods. (See section 2.6.)
solved with the resin supplier. The following resins are
commonly used to fabricate FRP duct for the corrosion These resins exhibit excellent high temperature resist-
industry. ance up to 250_F (121_C) (higher in some applica-

tions when approved by the resin supplier). The chlo- 2.2.5 Bisphenol A Fumarates
rendic resins offer very good chemical resistance to
most oxidizing environments, as well as to most con- These are made by reacting bisphenol “A” with propy-
centrated acids and to some solvents. They are poor in lene oxide to form a glycol, then further reacted with
alkaline service. They are also very rigid with poor im- fumaric acid to produce the resin, classified as a rigid
pact resistance properties. unsaturated polyester resin.
2.2.4 Vinyl Ester The resins offer excellent corrosion resistance to many
acids and alkalies, but are poor in oxidizing environs.
They are substantially better than isophthalic resins in
Vinyl ester resins are methacrylated epoxies similar to severe corrosion applications, but are most difficult to
unsaturated polyesters such as ortho, iso, and chlo- field wrap (adhesion problems). Bisphenol “A” resins
rendic resins. Both resin types are cured and handled are available in flame retardant versions, but generally
with the same room temperature curing agents. have been replaced with vinyl ester counterparts.
Because of their epoxy backbone, these resins exhibit 2.2.6 Other Resin Materials
excellent resistance to most acids, alkalies, hypochlo-
rites, and many solvents. They do not perform well in Furan, phenolic, and acrylic resins are not covered in
the presence of strong oxidizers. this manual. While these resins can be used to fabricate
air handling equipment and ductwork, they have
physical properties, handling, and application charac-
The vinyl esters are resilient (4 to 7% tensile elonga-
teristics substantially different from the materials cov-
tion), have excellent impact resistance, and high
ered by this document.
physical strength properties. They are preferred for fil-
ament winding machine made ducts. In the field, vinyl
2.3 MIXING AND CURING THERMOSETS
ester products are handled and joined with ease.
Unsaturated polyester and vinyl ester resins are usual-
The temperature resistance of unmodified vinyl esters ly shipped in 55 gallon (208 liter) drums in liquid form.
is in the 200 to 220_F (93 to 104_C) range, but in- They are available in low viscosity versions, suitable
creases to 250 to 300_F (121 to 150_C) for the higher for hand lay–up, spray–up, or filament winding.
density, cross–linked, novolac modified vinyl esters
described below. Many of the resins are sold as low viscosity, thixed and
prepromoted, for ease of handling in the shop or field
Novolac modified vinyl esters have higher density fabrication.
cross–linking sites available than the general purpose
vinyl esters. This higher density cross–linking results All of the above thermosets are cured using room tem-
in a more heat resistant polymer network that can tol- perature catalyst systems which are mixed into the liq-
erate temperatures up to 300_F (150_C). Although the uid resin prior to lay–up.
novolac modified resins are less resilient than the un-
modified vinyl esters, they still exhibit excellent me- 2.4 CATALYSTS, PROMOTERS, INHIBI-
chanical properties. TORS, AND OTHER ADDITIVES
For room temperature (RT) cure systems, catalysts,

Curing these modified resins may require different also referred to as initiators, are organic peroxides
peroxide catalysts to reduce the peak exotherm and which react with a suitable promoter to initiate the
prevent cracking or crazing of the resin rich areas. chemical exothermic reaction that polymerizes the
These resins are more reactive and therefore require resin and cures it into a hardened solid mass.
greater care in the fabrication of FRP laminates.
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP) is the most
There are flame retardant versions based on bromine widely used room temperature cure catalyst system.
technology which enhances flame retardance, corro- MEKP requires a promoter such as cobalt octoate or
sion resistance, weatherability, and better laminate cobalt naphthenate to generate free radicals which
color stability. However, to achieve Class I ratings as start the resin to polymerize. Sometimes different
determined by ASTM E84 test methods, 3 to 5% (by amines are added to accelerate the gel and cure time
weight of resin) of antimony trioxide is required. (See of the resin. CAUTION: THE MEKP MUST NEVER
section 2.6.) BE ADDED DIRECTLY TO THE COBALT NAPH-

THENATE OR OCTOATE PROMOTER. When direct- working conditions, promoter levels can be adjusted to
ly added to each other, they may be EXPLOSIVELY lengthen the gel time; likewise an inhibitor (very small
REACTIVE. Care must be taken to observe these pre- amount per resin supplier recommendation) can be
cautions to prevent accidents. added to extend the working time. Adjustments can
also be made in the catalyst level to either extend or
When the resins are not received prepromoted, the rec- shorten the cure time. The amount of catalyst used
ommended quantity of the promoter (see resin should never be less than 1% (by weight of resin)
manufacturer’s data sheet for the amounts required) MEKP or more than 2% (maximum). In order to get
can be added to the liquid resin and thoroughly mixed proper cure of a laminate for optimum results, a suffi-
into the drum or master batch of resin being prepared cient quantity of catalyst is required to completely
for use. react with the promoter to achieve full cross linkage of
the polymerized resin. Less than 1% of catalyst can re-
In order to determine the working time of a RT cured sult in undercure (not properly cross–linked) with re-
system, it is recommended that a small cup gel sultant poor performance of the FRP laminate when
(approximately 3.5 oz (100 grams) of promoted resin exposed to chemical attack. (See Figure 2-1.)
in a Dixie cup) be catalyzed with 1.25% (by resin
weight) of 9% active MEKP (also known as a 60%
Dimethylaniline (DMA) is one of a class of chemicals
solution of MEKP) be added to the resin. This test sam-
known as promoters or accelerators. DMA is a yellow
ple should be thoroughly mixed and continually agi-
liquid amine with a strong odor. The addition of DMA
tated and timed to first gel formation to establish the
is usually not required with RT MEKP cure systems.
working time for the lay–up process.
However, small amounts of DMA may be used to im-
prove Barcol development or shorten the cure time at
The working time of a resin can be influenced by many
cool temperatures.
factors: reactivity of a given resin, high or low temper-
ature in the work area, direct sunlight, humidity, thick-
ness of the laminate, and heat sink, when laying up on CAUTION – Promoters should always be mixed thor-
metal molds. When gel times are too short due to the oughly into the resin before adding the catalyst.
60
50
GEL TIME (Minutes)
40
30
20 60oF (15.5oC)
70oF (21.0oC)
10 80oF (26.5oC)
90oF (32.0oC)
0
% by weight 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
cc/gallon 20 40 60 80
MEK Peroxide (60% Solution)
Note: To convert cc/gal to fluid oz/gal divide by 29.6 cc/fluid oz
To convert cc/gal to cc/L divide by 3.8 L/gal
FIGURE 2--1 GEL TIME VS. CATALYST CONCENTRATION
AT VARIOUS TEMPERATURES

Inhibitors are used to lengthen the gel time of unsatu- oughly read and understood prior to working with
rated polyesters and vinyl ester resins. Inhibitors are these chemical products.
useful when very long gel times are required, or when
resins are curing too quickly due to high temperature. 2.6 FLAME RETARDANCE AND SMOKE
GENERATION
It is recommended that the resin manufacturer be The flame retardancy and smoke generation of ther-
asked which particular inhibitor system is suitable for moset FRP laminates are determined by the ASTM
use in their resin. E84 tunnel test method, under supervised conditions at
accredited test agencies equipped to perform such test-
Thixotropes, commonly called fumed silicas, are used s. This rating system is based on a scale that has assig-
to thicken low viscosity resins to reduce resin drainage ned asbestos cement board a flame spread (FS) value
on vertical surfaces during lay up. Unsaturated polyes- of zero and red oak a flame spread (FS) of 100.
ters are readily available with the fumed silica mixed
into the resins. Fumed silica can be added to vinyl ester S Class I laminates exhibit less than 25 FS.
resins using a high shear mixer to ensure uniform dis-
persion at the job site. Resins thus treated may exhibit S Class II laminates exhibit less than 75 FS.
a shortened shelf life. S Class III laminates have greater than 75 FS.
Vinyl ester resins are less stable than most unsaturated Note: Within a given class of laminates, smoke genera-
polyesters when thixed and promoted, or when stored tion varies depending on the types of resin and halogen
at above 70 to 75_F (21 to 24_C). Keep out of direct used. Formulation selection and the application of in-
sunlight. tumescent coatings have been used to reduce smoke
generation levels.
Cured non–halogenated polyester or vinyl ester resin
Flame spread and smoke development ratings are gen-
laminates will burn readily when exposed to flame,
erally based on test results obtained from controlled or
heat, and oxygen. However, when these resins are for-
small–scale bench tests. They are not necessarily pre-
mulated with a stable cross linked halogen such as
dictive of product performance in a real fire situation.
chlorine or bromine as cooked into the formulation,
Polyester and vinyl ester resins are organic materials
these halogenated resins exhibit flame retardant prop-
and the resins and products made from them will burn
erties which are further enhanced with the addition of
under the right conditions of heat and oxygen supply.
an antimony oxide such as antimony trioxide or anti-
The numerical flame spread rating is not intended to
mony pentoxide. The antimony acts as a synergist
reflect hazards presented by this, or any other material,
which reacts with the halogen source to greatly im-
under actual fire conditions.
prove the resin’s flame retardant properties. The anti-
mony by itself, when added to a non–flame retardant For hand lay–up laminates, using halogenated resins,
resin, does not impart any flame retardance, but acts 3 to 5% of antimony trioxide or pentoxide are required
only as a costly filler with possible lower chemical re- to achieve Class I FS ratings. The percent additive ra-
sistant properties. The use of antimony oxides causes tio of both trioxide and pentoxide are not always equal
the normally clear translucent laminate to turn opaque on a 1:1 basis. The resin manufacturer will categorize
which creates problems for inspectors to visually ex- the correct FS values obtained with either of the anti-
amine the laminate for fabrication flaws. When it is mony oxide systems as evaluated with each specific
critical for the corrosion liner to be visually clear for resin as tested.
optimum corrosion resistance, it is recommended that
antimony be added to the outer structural portion of the Antimony pentoxide is supplied in a liquid colloidal
laminate only, such fabrication is commonly accepted suspension, while antimony trioxide is supplied in
by the chemical industry requiring Class I flame retar- powder form. The liquid pentoxide usually lengthens
dance. the gel time and can retard surface cure when too much
of the additive is used. However, the pentoxide solu-
2.5 MATERIALS HANDLING tions do not completely turn the laminate opaque, but
rather allow some translucency of the cured laminate,
which is beneficial for inspection purposes.
When handling catalysts, cobalt promoters, DMA, and
inhibitors, proper care must be taken to handle each 2.7 ULTRAVIOLET STABILIZERS
product in a safe manner as shown on the Material
Safety Data Sheet as supplied by each product FRP duct exposed to outdoor weathering may suffer
manufacturer. These safety data sheets should be thor- surface degradation, chalking, and discoloration when

exposed to the sun, rain and wind. Polyesters are more 2.8.2 Chopped Strand Mat
ultraviolet (UV) stable than vinyl ester resins. The
addition of a suitable UV stabilizer to the outermost Two types of chopped strand mat are used for corro-
layer will retard the rate of degradation. sion control Type “E” (electrical grade) and “ECR”
glass (electrical corrosion resistant). The glass fibers
2.8 TYPES OF REINFORCEMENT are chemically treated and coated to enhance wet out
by the resin. The fibers are bundled to form continuous
The selection of glass reinforcement depends on the multi–fiber strands held together with a compatible
capabilities of a specific thermosetting resin in com- binder. The glass fibers are chopped in place to form
bination with the various types of available glass a flat mat surface of various weights and thickness:
manufacturers’ products. The glass should wet out 0.75, 1.5, and 2.0 oz/ft2 (225, 450, and 610 g/m2) are
readily and no glass fiber should be visible in the final most often used for corrosion applications.
cured laminate. The basic forms of reinforcement used
are:
Spray–chop uses continuous fiber chopped and wet
out with resin onto the mold. This method is common-
S surfacing veil
ly used on larger surfaces to save labor.
S chopped strand mat
Both mat and spray–chop require hand roll–out to den-
S woven roving sify the resulting laminate.
S continuous strand roving (filament winding) 2.8.3 Woven Roving
2.8.1 Surfacing Veil

Woven roving consists of continuous glass fiber rov-
ings that are woven together to form a heavy woven
The surfacing veil provides reinforcement for the resin
material which is available in several weights and
rich liner, which prevents the cracking or crazing of
thicknesses. Alternating layers of woven roving and
this resin surface and also acts to block protruding
chopped strand mat are used to form the structural lay-
thicker glass fibers (chopped strand mat) from reach-
er of the laminate. Woven roving greatly increases the
ing the surface and providing chemical wicking into
physical properties of a composite laminate.
the laminate structure. The most common type of sur-
facing veil used is “C” glass veil. However, when the
corrodent attacks glass, a synthetic fiber (saturated 2.8.4 Continuous Strand Roving
polyester), such as NEXUSR, can be used in place of
“C” veil. The continuous glass fibers are wound into a cylindri-
cal package for processing. Continuous strand roving
Carbon veil or mat and synthetic conductive veil are is used for filament winding or chopped in place for
sometimes specified to provide a conductive surface spray up applications to replace chopped strand mat.
for static electric charge dissipation to ground. Carbon Filament winding provides higher strengths at lower
veil is also good for corrosion control and abrasion re- thicknesses. However, the filament wound laminate
sistance. by itself has limited corrosion resistance.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CHAPTER 3
LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION
CHAPTER 3 LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION
3.1 INTRODUCTION containing approximately 75% resin and 25% fiber re-
inforcement. The fiber length shall be 1/2 in. (12.7
The laminate construction sequence for corrosion re- mm) minimum to 2 in (50.8 mm) maximum, randomly
sistant FRP laminates is based on industry standards dispersed. For FRP duct the physical strength proper-
ASTM C581, ASTM C582, and ASME RTP–1–1995. ties of the interior layers have been included in calcu-
The information provided in this manual for FRP duct lating the minimum strength properties required for
and hoods supplements ASTM D3982–92 Standard the FRP duct system.
Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass
Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Duct and 3.4 STRUCTURAL LAYER
Hoods. (See Figure 3-1.)
The structural portion of the laminate (including mat
layers of the corrosion barrier), which is designed to
3.2 CORROSION BARRIER RESIN provide the physical strength properties required for
the FRP duct, shall be laid up as follows:
The resin used shall be a commercial–grade polyester
or vinyl ester, acceptable for the service conditions as a. Type I – Apply all chopped strand mat or
tested by ASTM C581 or from established case histo- equivalent chopped strand roving in the
ries, documenting the suitability of the resin for the spray–up method, to achieve the designed
service conditions. minimum thickness (70 to 75% resin, 25 to
30% glass). (See Table 5-1.)
The resin may contain, flame retardant additives in ac-
b. Type II – Apply alternating plies of chopped
cordance with the resin producers’ recommendations
strand mat or equivalent chopped strand rov-
or as allowed in ASTM C582. The resin may not con- ing, interspersed with a ply of woven–roving
tain any fillers or pigments unless agreed to by the end 24 oz/yd2 (810 g/m2) as required by the
user. construction sequence to achieve the mini-
mum required design thickness. Woven rov-
If static electricity is a factor for consideration, the in- ing must be separated with a ply of chopped
ner surface of the ductwork shall be grounded with a mat or chopped fiber, (55 to 72% resin, 28 to
maximum resistance to ground of 105 τ. This conduc- 45% glass). (See Table 5-2.)
tive surface can be fabricated with carbon veil or syn-
thetic conductive veil plus resin to form a conductive c. Type X – Apply filament wound continuous
liner for static electricity control. (Consult your resin strand roving to achieve the designed mini-
supplier for formulation and test methods required.) mum wall thickness (40 to 50% resin, 50 to
60% glass). (See Table 5-6.)
3.3 CORROSION BARRIER
3.5 EXTERIOR SURFACE
This critical segment of the laminate consists of a resin For added service life, the exterior surface over woven
rich inner surface, followed by an interior layer layed–up roving or filament winding may have a layer of
using two plies of 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) chopped mat, chopped fiber or surfacing veil to provide corrosion re-
for a combined minimum thickness of 100 mils (2.5 mm) sistance to chemical spillage and weathering.
in all laminates (Types I, II, and X).
The exterior surface shall be coated with a resin rich
3.3.1 Inner Surface layer containing paraffin wax to prevent air inhibition
of surface resin cure. The exterior surface glass rein-
The inner corrosion resistant surface is a resin rich lay- forcement plus resin should also contain a UV (ultra-
er reinforced with surfacing veil (Type “C” glass veil violet) screener, a pigment, or be painted to resist UV
or NEXUSR synthetic fiber). This layer is approxi- degradation of the cured surface resin, particularly
mately 90% resin and 10% reinforcement, resulting in when FRP ducting is exposed outdoors.
a layer 10 to 20 mils (0.25 to 0.50 mm) thick.
Pigmentation can be incorporated into the exterior sur-
face for appearance and color coding of the duct instal-
3.3.2 Interior Layer (Corrosion Barrier) lation.
This layer is formed with 2 plies of 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 To enhance flame and smoke properties, an intumes-
g/m2) chopped strand mat or equivalent chopped cent coating can be used on the exterior surface (check
strand roving, treated with a compatible sizing system, with your resin supplier).

CORROSION BARRIER
2 PLIES 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2)
TYPE “E” CHOPPED STRAND MAT
100 mils (2.5 mm) (min.)
TYPE I
EXTERIOR SURFACE
ALL CHOPPED OR 1–1/2 oz/ft2

(450 g/m2) MAT TO DESIRED
INTERIOR SURFACE WALL THICKNESS
2 LAYERS
RESIN RICH – 10 to 20 mils
1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) MAT
(0.25 to 0.50 mm) TYPE “C” VEIL
1/2 in. (12.7 mm) LAP (min.) ALTERNATING PLIES OF MAT
1/2 in. (12.7 mm) LAP (min.)
AND WOVEN ROVING TO
DESIRED WALL THICKNESS
CORROSION BARRIER
2 PLIES 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2)
TYPE “E” CHOPPED STRAND MAT TYPE II
100 mils (2.5 mm) (min.)
INTERIOR SURFACE
RESIN RICH – 10 to 20 mils 2 LAYERS
(0.25 to 0.50 mm) TYPE “C” VEIL 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) MAT
1/2 in. (12.7 mm) LAP (min.) 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) LAP (min.) FILAMENT WOUND (TYPE X)
CORROSION BARRIER
2 PLIES 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) TYPE X
TYPE “E” CHOPPED STRAND MAT
100 mils (2.5 mm) (min.)
NOTE:
THE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES FOR MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS INCLUDE THE 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2)
CHOPPED STRAND MAT PLIES OF THE CORROSION BARRIER.
FIGURE 3--1 LAY–UP SEQUENCE FOR FRP DUCT –

TYPES I, II, AND X LAMINATES

3.6 POTENTIAL ADHESION PROBLEMS Control and Safety for additional requirements and
DURING LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION testing.)
It is important to recognize that thermoset composite 3.8 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

laminates, when fully cured, do not chemically bond
together. The cured surfaces must be properly pre- The minimum physical properties for Types I and II,
pared for secondary bonding. and Filament Wound (Type X) laminates shall be as
shown in Tables 5-3 and 5-7, respectively. Laminates
During laminate construction, it is not advisable to lay which do not meet the minimum values may be consid-
up the corrosion barrier and leave it to fully cure over ered acceptable provided that they are designed and
several days (weekend – holiday). If this is unavoid- fabricated to afford the same overall strength based on
able, the entire outer surface must be roughened to re- a necessarily thicker laminate.
move hardened resin. Then, prior to overlaying with
the structural portion of the laminate, the roughened 3.9 SURFACE HARDNESS
surface should be coated with catalyzed resin and
chopped glass fiber to form a tie coat for the subse- The laminate shall have an average Barcol hardness of
quent plies of the structural layer, thus creating an ac- at least 90% of the resin manufacturer’s published
ceptable interlaminar mechanical bond. hardness for the cured resin, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D2583. (See section 8.1.4 – for detailed
Under normal conditions, the sections of duct and surface hardness requirements and testing.)
hoods should be completed within a 24 hour period to
achieve a chemical bond. Exception: Laminate surfaces finished with synthetic
veil and resin are considered adequately cured when
3.7 WALL THICKNESS TOLERANCE the average hardness, established as described above,
equals or exceeds 80% of the Barcol hardness value es-
The design wall thickness (also referred to as required tablished by the resin manufacturer for the cured resin.
wall thickness) shall be as selected for the application
from the appropriate tables for round (Chapter 5) or 3.10 APPEARANCE
rectangular (Chapter 6) duct, but in no case less than
1/8 in. (3.18 mm) thick. For the purpose of evaluating The corrosion barrier laminate shall be free of visual
the acceptability of a duct’s wall thickness, its average defects, such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, air
wall thickness shall be established as the arithmetic bubbles, pinholes, pimples and delamination as de-
average of six spot thickness values taken at random. fined by ASTM–2563 Level II. The remainder of the
This average thickness shall not be less than 85%, nor laminate (outer structural portion) shall be free of visu-
greater than 120%, of the design wall thickness. Addi- al defects as commercially practical. The exterior sur-
tionally, of all thickness readings taken, the lowest face shall be smooth and resin rich with no dry fiber
shall not be less than 70%, nor greater than 130%, of visible. All cut ends shall be resin coated to prevent
the design wall thickness. (See Chapter 8 – Quality moisture absorption.


CHAPTER 4
FIELD JOINING PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 4 FIELD JOINING PROCEDURES
4.1 INTRODUCTION b. It is often necessary to stage the application

of the field wrap in layers of saturated fiber-
For field installation of FRP duct, the butt–and–strap glass mat consisting of only two or three plies
or bell–and–spigot joining techniques shall be used to at a time, depending on the total thickness of
bond sections of duct together. the joint.
c. On a flat surface covered with release film

While the procedure is similar to shop fabrication
(such as MylarR), lay the widest section of fi-
when making the duct, it is recommended that proper- berglass mat and wet out with the catalyzed
ly trained personnel be used for field work. resin mix. Work the resin up through the dry
fiberglass mat to minimize air entrapment.
The field wrapped joints shall use the same type of res- Then add and wet out successive plies until
in as used to fabricate the duct and follow the same the layer to be applied is fully saturated.
lay–up sequence as specified for the duct except for
Filament Wound (Type X) laminates which require a d. Coat the prepared duct surface with a liberal
special bond construction. (See Table 5-8.) layer of catalyzed resin mix prior to wrapping
the joint.
The thickness of the wrapped joint overlay shall be
equal or greater than the thickest section of the FRP e. Commence the lay–up of the joint wrap onto
duct being joined. the duct. Use a 3 to 4 in. (75 to 100 mm) wide
brush and serrated rollers to work-in the res-
in. (See Figure 4-1.)
4.2 PREPARATION FOR JOINING DUCT
Note: The method of applying the presaturated fiber-
a. Cut the FRP duct to the desired length, mak- glass mat wrap is similar to wrapping a bandage on a
ing sure that the cut ends are cut squarely to person’s arm or leg. (See Figure 4-2.)
butt closely as per the tolerances specified in
section 7.26. f. Continue working the joint by rolling the res-
in from the center of the joint to the outer ed-
b. If there is an internal weld, prepare the inner ges. Use moderate force with a serrated roller
surface prior to joining the sections together. to expel trapped air out of the laminate. Be
careful not to remove too much resin. Each
c. With a disc sander, medium to course grit, layer of fiberglass mat should overlap the ply
roughen the ends of the duct to be joined, re- beneath it (1/2 to 1 in. (12.7 to 25 mm) wider)
moving the resin rich surface to a length 1 to and bond directly to the duct in order to
2 inches (25 to 50 mm) longer than the butt– achieve secondary bonding. If the joint looks
weld surface to be joined. The sanded surface dry, use additional mixed, catalyzed resin
should be white, showing some fiber ends, during rolling.
dust free, no moisture or contamination (use
clean, dry rags to clean joint surfaces). The g. Continue adding plies of resin saturated fi-
roughened surface must be dry and clean in berglass mat until the joint is completed,
order to achieve the proper secondary bond smoothed out from the center of the wrap to
strength. the edges and allowed to cure. (See Figures
4-3 and 4-4.)
d. Bell–and–spigot joints are prepared for join- h. For large diameter ducting, the presaturated
ing in the same manner as detailed above for fiberglass strapping should be applied in
butt–and–strap end–to–end joints. (See the shorter sections around the circumference for
Joining Procedures photos at the end of this ease in handling. Complete the wrapped joint
chapter.) around the duct with additional sections of fi-
berglass strapping.
4.3 PREPARATION OF STRAPPING
i. After the joint has hardened and cooled
a. In preparation for lay–up, cut sufficient quan- down, apply a top coat of resin mix contain-
tity of fiberglass mat according to size and ply ing refined paraffin wax and UV screener to
requirements. Vendors often supply lay–up finish the wrapped joint. UV and wax addi-
fiberglass strapping kits based on the size of tives should be pre–dissolved in styrene
the duct to the joined. monomer before adding to resin mix.

EQUAL OVERLAP
ON EACH SIDE
LAY--UP ON 3” to 4” (75 to 100 mm)

RELEASE FILM 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) CHOPPED STRAND MAT
WIDTH FIRST PLY
1” (25.4 mm) OVERLAP

SIDES AND ENDS
FIBERGLASS MAT IMPREGNATED WITH RESIN TO FORM AN INTEGRAL UNIT FOR BUTT--AND--
STRAP FIELD JOINTS. REFER TO TABLES 5--1 OR 5--2, AND 7--5 FOR BOND CONSTRUCTION
WHEN JOINING TYPES I AND II LAMINATES, AND TABLE 5--8 WHEN JOINING FILAMENT WOUND
(TYPE X) LAMINATES
FIGURE 4-- 1 PREPARATION OF STRAPPING
ROUGHENED
AREA
BLEND AREAS
PUTTY FILLED
THICKNESS OF OVER WRAP SHOULD BE EQUAL OR GREATER THAN THE THICKNESS OF THE
FRP DUCT. REFER TO TABLES 5--1 OR 5--2, AND 7--5 FOR BOND CONSTRUCTION WHEN JOIN-
ING TYPES I AND II LAMINATES, AND TABLE 5--8 WHEN JOINING FILAMENT WOUND (TYPE X)
LAMINATES
FIGURE 4-- 2 APPLICATION OF STRAPPING

MULTIPLE PLIES OF 1–1/2 oz/ft2
(450 g/m2) MAT WITH THE
THICKNESS OF WRAP TO BE
EQUAL OR THICKER THAN THE
FRP DUCT
PUTTY FILLED
JOINT
LAMINATES
FIGURE 4-- 3 BUTT–AND–STRAP END–TO–END JOINT
PUTTY FILLETS
1” (25.4 mm) OR
INTERIOR FILLET MUST BE 2” (50 mm) LAP
APPLIED BEFORE INSERTING SPIGOT
LAMINATES
FIGURE 4--4 BELL–AND–SPIGOT JOINING METHOD

60
50
GEL TIME (Minutes)
40
30
20 60oF (15.5oC)
70oF (21.0oC)
10 80oF (26.5oC)
90oF (32.0oC)
0
% by weight 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
cc/gallon 20 40 60 80
MEK Peroxide (60% Solution)
Note: To convert cc/gal to fluid oz/gal divide by 29.6 cc/fluid oz
To convert cc/gal to cc/L divide by 3.8 L/gal
FIGURE 4--5 GEL TIME VS. CATALYST CONCENTRATION
AT VARIOUS TEMPERATURES
4.4 MIXING RESIN a. The interior joint surface shall be rough

sanded prior to joining the duct sections.
The resin used for joining FRP duct shall be the same
type used to fabricate the duct. b. Fill the gap between the duct ends with a
fumed silica filled, catalyzed resin, typically
4.5 JOINING DUCT showing a “butter–like” consistency. Trowel
the filled resin into the gap and smooth the
Seal the ends of the duct to be joined with resin. Squeeze surface flush with the interior of the duct. Use
together and hold the sections firmly in a fixture until the a hot cure system (increasing the amount of
joint has been completely laid up in place and hardened. catalyst to expedite the cure).
Butted sections can be taped using three 2 in. x 2 in. (50
x 50 mm) pieces of fiberglass mat saturated with cata- c. Prior to lay–up of the interior joint, hand sand
lyzed resin to form a tack–weld. For this purpose, the res- the joint area with coarse sand paper and re-
in cure time can be speeded up by increasing the amount move all dust residue with clean, dry rags.
of MEKP added (hot–patch).
d. Proceed to lay–up the two plies of the internal
4.6 INTERNAL JOINT LAMINATING PRO- joint using the same procedure as used for ex-
CEDURE ternal joints. Finish the internal joint with one
layer of veil and one finish coat of paraffi-
When specified on the installation drawings and ac- nated resin.
cessible, the interior joints of large diameter duct (22
in. (550 mm) or larger) shall be internally sealed with 4.7 CLEAN–UP
two overlapping plies of 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2)
chopped strand mat. This inner lay–up of the exposed All equipment should be cleaned in a safety solvent af-
duct ends requires the same preparation and lay–up ter each use and wiped dry. Safety solvent can also be
procedure as used for the exterior joint as follows: used to clean up work areas.

JOINING PROCEDURES
Courtesy of Ashland Chemical
1 Firmly support pipe sections. Square the ends to be 2 Rough the outside surfaces with sander approxi-
joined using a saber saw. mately 1 in. (25 mm) farther in from the ends than the
finished joint surface. Where inside joints are possible,
interior surfaces should be sanded prior to assembly.
3 Coat roughened end edges of pipe with small 4 Support components in joint position as rigidly as
amount of catalyzed resin. Any large voids may be possible so that no movement occurs while making the
filled with a fumed silica filled resin putty. joint. Fill joint with resin.

5 A hot–patch technique (see section 4.5) may help 6 Lay out fiberglass mat strips on the work table.
prevent movement of pipe during the weld–cure peri- Length of each strip should be two inches longer than
od. Wet 2 in. (50 mm) squares of mat with a small circumference of duct. Strips longer than 36 in. (915
amount of resin. Apply hot–patches at intervals around mm) may be cut in half to simplify application. Mix
joint. Curing or hardening in a matter of minutes, they prescribed amount of catalyst with required amount of
secure duct sections in proper alignment. Mix resin resin in a separate clean container. Prepare only the
and catalyst for hot–patches in a small paper cup and amount of resin which can be used immediately (about
safely discard after use to avoid contaminating the 1 qt (0.9 liter) per 6 ft2 (0.55 m2) of mat). Resin will
laminating resin. harden in approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
7 After mixing in the catalyst thoroughly, pour the res- 8 Place the next widest strip onto the first the first with
in onto the widest mat first. Spread it over the entire one end of the second strip starting approximately 1 in.
mat strip, working it into the mat fibers manually. in from end of the first. Doing this with each succes-
(Neoprene gloves are recommended.) sive strip results in a feathered edge to produce a
smooth weld strip joint. (See Figure 4-1.) Add more
resin and work into the second strip.

9 Add other strips in the same manner. In preparing 10 Pick up the completed joining strip by one end and
each strip, it is best to be a little “lean” on resin at this center it carefully on the duct joint. Apply the tapered
stage rather than over–wetting. More resin may be end first with the narrowest strip placed directly on the
added later, if necessary. After laying the final strip, duct joint.
compress strips together with glove–protected hand to
remove large air bubbles and to make sure all layers
are wetted with the resin.
11 Be sure the joining strip is centered, with care tak- 12 Finish the application of the joining strip with the
en to avoid wrinkles on the under or back side of the roller. Any remaining air bubbles will appear as light
joint. Continue applying the strip around the joint until spots. These should be rolled to the edge of the joint
the free end overlaps the beginning. Lightly press out where they will be released and disappear. If joint is
the air bubbles with gloved hands. not a straight butt joint, a little extra rolling and hand
work to shape mat strips to structure configuration will
eliminate bumps and ridges.

13 At this stage, resin may be added where necessary
if any mat appears to be not thoroughly wetted. It is 14 Allow the completed joint to completely cure,
better to have too little resin on the joining strip, when tack free. Do not remove or disturb joint until it is thor-
applied, than too much. Over wetting makes it difficult oughly cured. If temperature is below 55_F (13_C),
to keep the strips in place. Finally, coat the remaining keep joined areas warm with heat lamps. For exterior
surface areas with resin. installations, protect the joint from the weather.

CHAPTER 5
DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT

CHAPTER 5 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT
5.1 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCTS US- 5.1.3 Design for Negative Pressure
ING TYPES I AND II LAMINATES (Vacuum)
For the practical application of the tables in this sec-
5.1.1 Introduction
tion, it suffices to say that Tables 5-4 and 5-4M list the
maximum recommended operating negative pressure
The design procedures and fabrication requirements
for Types I and II laminates.
described in this chapter apply to round (cylindrical)
FRP ducts, intended for positive and negative pressure Note: For a detailed discussion of the development of
(vacuum) systems, operating in corrosive environ- the design tables contained in this manual, the as-
ments at temperatures up to 180_F (82_C) and fabri- sumptions and design concepts on which the ratings
cated from laminates based on thermoset polyester are based, and the testing program which validates the
resins having a heat deflection temperature (HDT) of results, see Appendix A.
180_F (82_C) or higher. Higher temperature applica-
tions require special premium grade resins exhibiting The data in Tables 5-4 and 5-4M is arranged with the
higher HDT’s to suit the higher temperature require- nominal laminate thickness heading the columns and
ments based on the resin manufacturer’s recommenda- a series of duct diameters listed vertically, starting
tions for such service. with the smallest at 4 in. (100 mm) to the largest at 72
in. (1800 mm).
Exception: Laminates fabricated from resin systems The tables are based on two important assumptions:
having an HDT of less than 180_F (82_C) may be used
to fabricate FRP ducts designed using the procedures a. the safety factor for each combination of lam-
and tables contained in this manual when the corro- inate thickness and diameter is equal to or
sion and operation temperature requirements of the in- greater than 4.0, and
tended application can be met with the selected resin
b. the distance between supports is a maximum
system.
of 10 ft (3050 mm).
FRP ducts fabricated per the requirements of this sec- Typically, before selecting the required laminate
tion shall be fabricated by hand lay–up or contact thickness for a particular application, the system de-
molding methods using Types I and II laminates as design pressure (positive or negative), the duct diameter,
scribed in Chapter 3. and the laminate type are known.
5.1.2 Minimum Laminate Physical Charac- 5.1.3.1 Required Laminate Thickness

teristics To select the required laminate thickness, first deter-
mine the system design pressure. If the system design
The number and sequence of plies of fiberglass rein- pressure is positive, go to section 5.1.4. If the system
forcement required for each type and laminate thick- design pressure is negative, use either Table 5-4 or
ness are listed in Tables 5-1 and 5-2. The minimum re- 5-4M to complete the following steps:
quired physical characteristics for laminate Types I
and II are listed in Table 5-3. These tables are reprinted a. Find the smallest diameter listing that equals
from ASME RTP–1–1995 Edition, courtesy of the or exceeds the diameter of the duct under
American Society of Mechanical Engineers. consideration.
b. Move horizontally within the range of the ap-
The physical characteristics of the design laminate, on propriate laminate type and find the mini-
which the duct fabrication is predicated, must meet or mum pressure rating that equals or exceeds
exceed the minimum values listed in Table 5-3. Sub- the system design pressure.
stantiation of laminate properties may be in the form
of current or historical test records for the laminate un- c. Move vertically to the header of the column
der consideration. Tests supporting laminate proper- and identify the corresponding nominal lami-
ties must have been performed per the requirements of nate thickness.
ASTM D638–96.
5.1.3.2 Laminate Construction and Minimum
Required Mechanical Properties
Note: Duct construction using Filament Wound (Type
X) laminates is discussed in section 5.2, including de- To complete the selection of the basic construction re-
sign tables and minimum laminate physical character- quirements for FRP ducts, two additional pieces of in-
istics. formation must be identified:

a. Laminate Reinforcement Sequence – From Although cylindrical shapes are inherently very strong
Table 5-1 or 5-2, select the appropriate rein- under positive internal pressure, requiring minimal
forcement sequence for the required laminate wall thickness to contain pressures in excess of posi-
thickness previously selected from Table 5-4 tive 30 in. wg (7500 Pa), we are recommending a
or 5-4M. heavier wall to avoid ovalling of the duct over ex-
tended periods of time and to absorb, without damage,
b. Minimum Required Mechanical Properties – the rigors of handling during fabrication, transport,
From Table 5-3, identify the minimum lami- and installation.
nate properties required to meet the design
ratings of Tables 5-4 and 5-4M.
5.1.5 Selection of Flange Details
5.1.4 Design for Positive Pressure
The following wall thickness requirements shall apply Flanges for round FRP ducts fabricated from any of the
to round FRP ducts intended for applications operating laminates covered by this manual shall be fabricated
under positive internal pressure up to 30 in. wg (7500 per the requirements of this section, Table 5-5, Figure
Pa): 5-1, and any applicable requirements from Chapter 7.
DIAMETER LAMINATE THICKNESS To select appropriate flange details for a specific ap-
in. (mm) in. (mm) plication, refer to Table 5-5 and based on the duct di-
4–12 (100–300) 0.125 (3.18) ameter, find the minimum diameter listing that equals
or exceeds it. Use the flange details listed for that di-
13–36 (325–900) 0.188 (4.76) ameter following the notes and dimensional informa-
37–72 (950–1800) 0.250 (6.35) tion from Figure 5-1.

Nominal Thickness Drafting
Number and Sequence of Plies
[Notes (1) and (2)] Symbols
in. (mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
0.139 (3.53) V M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 3M
0.182 (4.62) V M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 4M
0.225 (5.72) V M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 5M
0.268 (6.81) V M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 6M
0.311 (7.89) V M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 7M
0.354 (8.99) V M M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 8M
0.397 (10.08) V M M M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 9M
0.440 (11.18) V M M M M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 10M
0.483 (12.27) V M M M M M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 11M
0.526 (13.36) V M M M M M M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... ... V, 12M
0.569 (14.45) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M ... ... ... ... V, 13M
0.612 (15.54) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M ... ... ... V, 14M
0.655 (16.64) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M ... ... V, 15M
0.698 (17.73) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M ... V, 16M
0.741 (18.82) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 17M
Table 5-- 1 Standard Composition of Type I Laminates
GENERAL NOTES:
a. SMACNA added laminate (V, 3M) to original ASME table. Modified table is intended for FRP duct construction purposes only.
b. Actual thickness and glass content of each sequence of plies shall be established by each Fabricator based on his design basis laminate.
c. Corrosion barrier (plies 1, 2, and 3) shall gel and exotherm before structural plies are added.
d. Structural lay–up may be interrupted at intervals long enough to exotherm in accordance with Fabricator’s procedure.
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

e. A weight equivalent layer or layers of chopped strand glass or mat may be used in place of layers of 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) mat.
f. Metric units were added by SMACNA to original ASME table.
g. Table information reprinted from ASME RTP–1–1995 Edition, Table M1A–2, courtesy of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
(ASME RTP-1a-1996 Addenda has renumbered source table as Table 2A-1.)
NOTES:
1. Nominal thickness is calculated as follows:
V = 10 mil surface mat (veil) – 0.010 in./ply (0.25 mm/ply)
M = 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) mat – 0.043 in./ply (1.09 mm/ply)
2. This information is based on historical data and may not reflect all laminates made today. Laminates made today are often thinner and have a higher glass
5.3
content. The table should be used for establishing minimum glass plies per nominal laminate thickness. Ply thickness should be based on design basis laminates.
Nominal Thickness Drafting
5.4
[N
[Notes (1)
( ) and
d (2)]
( )] Number and Sequence of Plies
Symbols
in. (mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.215 (5.46) V M M M R M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 2M, MRM
0.291 (7.39) V M M M R M R M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 2M, 2(MR)M
0.367 (9.32) V M M M R M R M R M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 2M, 3(MR)M
0.410 (10.41) V M M M R M R M R M M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 2M, 3(MR)M, M
0.486 (12.34) V M M M R M R M R M M R M ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V, 2M, 3(MR)M, MRM
0.562 (14.27) V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M ... ... ... ... ... V, 2M, 3(MR)M, 2(MR)M
0.638 (16.21) V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M R M ... ... ... V, 2M, 3(MR)M, 3(MR)M
0.681 (17.29) V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M R M M ... ... V, 2M, 3(MR)M, 3(MR)M,M
0.757 (19.23) V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M R M M R M V, 2M, 3(MR)M, 3(MR)M, MRM
Table 5--2 Standard Composition of Type II Laminates
GENERAL NOTES:
a. Actual thickness and glass content of each sequence of plies shall be established by each Fabricator based on his design basis laminate.
b. Corrosion barrier (plies 1, 2, and 3) shall gel and exotherm before structural plies are added.
c. Structural lay–up may be interrupted long enough to exotherm between adjacent “MM” plies. If required by fabrication procedure, location of exotherm plies
(plies 10 and 17) may be shifted within the laminate body. No plies may be omitted.
d. A weight equivalent layer or layers of chopped strand glass or mat may be used in place of layers of 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) mat.
e. Metric units were added by SMACNA to original ASME table.
f. Table information reprinted from ASME RTP–1–1995 Edition, Table M1A–3, courtesy of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
(ASME RTP-1a-1996 Addenda has renumbered source table as Table 2A-2.)
NOTES:
1. Nominal thickness is calculated as follows:
V = 10 mil surface mat (veil) – 0.010 in./ply (0.25 mm/ply)
M = 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) mat – 0.043 in./ply (1.09 mm/ply)
R = 24 oz/yd2 (810 g/m2) woven roving – 0.033 in./ply (0.84 mm/ply)
2. This information is based on historical data and may not reflect all laminates made today. Laminates made today are often thinner and have a higher glass
content. The table should be used for establishing minimum glass plies per nominal laminate thickness. Ply thickness should be based on design basis laminates.

Nominal Ultimate Tensile Tensile Modulus, Ultimate Flexural Flexural Modulus,
Thickness Type Strength, psi (MPa) psi (MPa) Strength, psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
in. (mm) [Note (1)] [Note (1)] [Note (2)] [Note (2)]
ALL I 9.0 x 103 (62) 1.0 x 106 (6900) 16.0 x 103 (110) 0.7 x 106 (4850)
0.215 (5.5) II 12.0 x 103 (83) 1.3 x 106 (8950) 19.0 x 103 (131) 0.8 x 106 (5500)
0.291 (7.4) II 13.5 x 103 (93) 1.4 x 106 (9650) 20.0 x 103 (138) 0.9 x 106 (6200)
0.367 (9.3) and up II 15.0 x 103 (104) 1.5 x 106 (10350) 22.0 x 103 (152) 1.0 x 106 (6900)
Table 5-- 3 Minimum Mechanical Properties of Types I and II Laminates

GENERAL NOTES:
a. The tabulated values remain unchanged up to 180_F (82_C). Above that temperature, measured properties
may decrease.
b. Metric units were added by SMACNA to original ASME table.
c. Table information reprinted from ASME RTP–1–1995 Edition, Table M1A–4, courtesy of the American So-
ciety of Mechanical Engineers. (ASME RTP-1a-1996 Addenda has renumbered source table as Table 2A-3.)
NOTES:
1. ASTM D638 at 73_F (23_C)
2. ASTM D790 at 73_F (23_C)

5.6
10 ft Support Span Round Duct Min. Safety Factor of 4.0
LAMINATES TYPE I TYPE II
Modulus of
1.0 x 106 1.3 x 106 1.4 x 106 1.5 x 106 1.5 x 106
Elasticity (E), psi
Thickness (in.) 0.139 0.182 0.225 0.268 0.311 0.354 0.397 0.440 0.483 0.215 0.291 0.367 0.410
Diameter (in.)
4 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
6 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
8 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
10 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
12 17.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
14 15.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
16 12.5 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
18 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
20 7.5 17.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ...
24 5.0 12.5 22.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... 27.5 30.0 ... ...
28 5.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... 22.5 30.0 ... ...
30 5.0 10.0 17.5 27.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... 20.0 30.0 ... ...
32 NR 7.5 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... 17.5 30.0 ... ...
36 NR 7.5 12.5 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... 15.0 30.0 ... ...
42 NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... 10.0 27.5 30.0 ...
48 NR 5.0 7.5 12.5 20.0 27.5 30.0 ... ... 10.0 22.5 30.0 ...
54 NR NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 22.5 30.0 ... ... 7.5 17.5 30.0 ...
60 NR NR 5.0 7.5 15.0 20.0 27.5 30.0 ... 5.0 15.0 30.0 ...
66 NR NR 5.0 7.5 12.5 17.5 22.5 30.0 ... 5.0 12.5 27.5 30.0
72 NR NR NR 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 5.0 12.5 27.5 30.0
Table 5--4 Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in in. wg

NOTES:
a. Cells marked NR (Not Rated) represent diameter and laminate combinations not covered by this table.
b. Cells marked ... represent diameter and laminate combinations beyond the scope of this manual. They are more than adequate at the maximum rating of 30
in. wg but become economically less attractive with increasing thickness.
c. To select Type I and II laminates for Positive pressure systems, see section 5.1.4.
3050 mm Support Span Round Duct Min. Safety Factor of 4.0
Modulus of
6.9 x 106 9.0 x 106 9.7 x 106 10.3 x 106 10.3 x 106
Elasticity (E), KPa
Thickness (mm) 3.53 4.62 5.72 6.81 7.90 8.99 10.08 11.18 12.27 5.46 7.39 9.32 10.41
Diameter (mm)
100 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
125 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
150 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
250 6200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
300 4350 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
350 3750 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
400 3100 6200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
450 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
500 1870 4350 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ...
600 1250 3100 5600 7500 ... ... ... ... ... 6850 7500 ... ...
700 1250 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... 5600 7500 ... ...
750 1250 2500 4350 6850 7500 ... ... ... ... 5000 7500 ... ...
800 NR 1870 3750 6200 7500 ... ... ... ... 4350 7500 ... ...
900 NR 1870 3100 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... 3750 7500 ... ...
1050 NR 1250 2500 3750 6200 7500 ... ... ... 2500 6850 7500 ...
1200 NR 1250 1870 3100 5000 6850 7500 ... ... 2500 5600 7500 ...

1350 NR NR 1250 2500 3750 5600 7500 ... ... 1870 4350 7500 ...
1500 NR NR 1250 1870 3750 5000 6850 7500 ... 1250 3750 7500 ...
1650 NR NR 1250 1870 3100 4350 5600 7500 ... 1250 3100 6850 7500
1800 NR NR NR 1870 2500 3750 5000 6200 7500 1250 3100 6200 7500
Table 5-- 4M Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in Pa
NOTES:
5.7
Duct Minimum Bolt Equivalent
a b tf
Diameter No. of Bolts Size Metric Bolt
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
4 (100) 2 (50) 2 (50) 0.215 (5.46) 4 5/16 M8
5 (130) 2 (50) 2 (50) 0.215 (5.46) 6 5/16 M8
6 (150) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.215 (5.46) 6 5/16 M8
8 (200) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.215 (5.46) 8 3/8 M10
10 (250) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.291 (7.39) 8 3/8 M10
12 (300) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.291 (7.39) 10 3/8 M10
14 (350) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.367 (9.32) 12 3/8 M10
16 (400) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.367 (9.32) 14 3/8 M10
18 (450) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.367 (9.32) 16 3/8 M10
20 (500) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.367 (9.32) 16 3/8 M10
24 (600) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.410 (10.41) 20 1/2 M12
28 (700) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.410 (10.41) 24 1/2 M12
30 (750) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.486 (12.34) 26 1/2 M12
32 (800) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.486 (12.34) 28 1/2 M12
36 (900) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.486 (12.34) 32 1/2 M12
42 (1050) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.562 (14.27) 36 1/2 M12
48 (1225) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.562 (14.27) 40 1/2 M12
54 (1375) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.638 (16.21) 42 1/2 M12
60 (1525) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.638 (16.21) 44 1/2 M12
66 (1675) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.638 (16.21) 48 1/2 M12
72 (1825) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.681 (17.29) 54 1/2 M12
Table 5--5 Minimum Flange Dimensions For Round Duct
BOLT HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED tf
b
tf
c
td
NOTES: a
1. ALL FLANGE CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE TYPE II LAMINATES EXCEPT 4 to 8 in. (100 to 200 mm)
DIAMETER DUCT WHICH MAY HAVE 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) TYPE I CONSTRUCTION. (THE FLANGE
THICKNESS (tf) LISTED IN TABLE 5--5 IS BASED ON TYPE II LAMINATES.)
2. DIMENSION c SHALL BE 40 to 50% OF DIMENSION b
3. DIMENSIONS a, b, and tf ARE CONSIDERED MINIMUMS. LARGER, HEAVIER FLANGES ARE ACCEPTABLE
WITH OWNER’S APPROVAL.
4. MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR BOLTS SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THOSE OF A307 TYPE BOLTS OR ISO
4017/4014 8.8 FOR METRIC BOLTS.
FIGURE 5--1 FRP FLANGE DETAILS

5.2 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCTS US- a. the safety factor for each combination of lam-
ING FILAMENT WOUND (TYPE X) inate thickness and diameter is equal to or
LAMINATES greater than 4.0, and
5.2.1 Introduction b. the distance between supports is a maximum

of 10 ft (3050 mm).
The design procedures and fabrication requirements
described in this chapter apply to round (cylindrical) Typically, before selecting the required laminate
FRP ducts, intended for positive and negative pressure thickness for a particular application, the system de-
sign pressure (positive or negative), the duct diameter,
(vacuum) systems, operating in corrosive environ-
ments at temperatures up to 180_F (82_C) and fabri- and the laminate type are known.
cated from laminates based on thermoset polyester
resins having a heat deflection temperature (HDT) of 5.2.3.1 Required Laminate Thickness
180_F (82_C) or higher. Higher temperature applica-
tions require special premium grade resins exhibiting To select the required laminate thickness, first deter-
higher HDT’s to suit the higher temperature require- mine the system design pressure. If the system design
ments based on the resin manufacturer’s recommenda- pressure is positive, go to section 5.2.4. If the system
tions for such service. design pressure is negative, use either Table 5-9 or
5-9M to complete the following steps:
FRP ducts fabricated per the requirements of this sec-
a. Find the smallest diameter listing that equals
tion shall be fabricated by contact molding methods
or exceeds the diameter of the duct under
using Filament Wound (Type X) laminates as de- consideration.
scribed in Chapter 3.
b. Move horizontally and find the minimum
5.2.2 Minimum Laminate Physical Charac- pressure rating that equals or exceeds the sys-
teristics tem design pressure.
The composite structure for each laminate combina- c. Move vertically to the header of the column
tion and their corresponding nominal thickness are and identify the corresponding laminate
listed in Table 5-6. The minimum required physical combination.
characteristics for Filament Wound (Type X) lami-
nates are listed in Table 5-7. 5.2.3.2 Laminate Construction and Minimum
5.2.3 Design for Negative Pressure
(Vacuum) To complete the selection of the basic construction re-
quirements for FRP ducts fabricated from Filament
For the practical application of the tables in this sec- Wound (Type X) laminates and operating under a neg-
tion, it suffices to say that Tables 5-9 and 5-9M list the ative design pressure, two more pieces of information
maximum recommended operating negative pressure must be identified:
for Filament Wound (Type X) laminates.
a. Composite Laminate Structure – From Table
5-6, select the appropriate composite lami-
Note: For a detailed discussion of the development of
nate structure corresponding to the laminate
the design tables contained in this manual, the as- combination previously selected from Table
sumptions and design concepts on which the ratings 5-9 or 5-9M.
are based, and the testing program which validates the
results, see Appendix A. b. Minimum Required Mechanical Properties –
From Table 5-7, identify the minimum lami-
The data in Tables 5-9 and 5-9M is arranged with the nate mechanical properties required to meet
Filament Wound (Type X) laminate combination (S1 the design ratings of Tables 5-9 and 5-9M.
through S13) heading the columns and a series of duct
diameters listed vertically, starting with the smallest at 5.2.4 Design for Positive Pressure
4 in. (100 mm) to the largest at 72 in. (1800 mm).
The following wall thickness requirements shall apply
The tables are based on two important assumptions: to round FRP ducts intended for applications operating

under positive internal pressure up to 30 in. wg (7500 Although cylindrical shapes are inherently very strong
Pa): under positive internal pressure, requiring minimal wall
thickness to contain pressures in excess of positive 30 in.
wg (7500 Pa), we are recommending a heavier wall to
LAMINATE avoid ovalling of the duct over extended periods of time
DIAMETER LAMINATE and to absorb, without damage, the rigors of handling
THICKNESS
in. (mm) COMBINATION during fabrication, transport, and installation.
in. (mm)
4–12 0.140
S1 5.2.5 Selection of Flange Details
(100–300) (3.56)
13–42 0.180 For the selection of appropriate flange details for FRP
S3
(325–1050) (4.57) ducts fabricated from Filament Wound (Type X) lami-
43–72 0.220 nates, refer to the table and selection procedure de-
S5
(1075–1800) (5.59) scribed in section 5.1.5.
Total Thickness
Combination Composite Structure
in. (mm)
S1 VMM* – 2 LHW** 0.040 Thick 0.140 (3.56)
S3 VMM – 4 LHW 0.080 Thick 0.180 (4.57)
S5 VMM – 6 LHW 0.120 Thick 0.220 (5.59)
S7 VMM – 8 LHW 0.180 Thick 0.260 (6.60)
S9 VMM – 10 LHW 0.200 Thick 0.300 (7.62)
S11 VMM – 12 LHW 0.240 Thick 0.340 (8.64)
S13 VMM – 14 LHW 0.280 Thick 0.380 (9.65)
S15 VMM – 16 LHW 0.320 Thick 0.420 (10.67)
S17 VMM – 18 LHW 0.360 Thick 0.460 (11.68)
S19 VMM – 20 LHW 0.400 Thick 0.500 (12.7)
S21 VMM – 22 LHW 0.440 Thick 0.540 (13.72)
Table 5-- 6 Filament Wound (Type X) Composite Laminates
NOTES:
* VMM – corrosion liner – 0.100 in. (2.54 mm)
** LHW – Layers Helix Winding – 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) per layer
Winding Angle between 60 and 70 degrees

Combination Thickness Hoop Modulus Axial Modulus
in. (mm) psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
S1 0.140 (3.56) 1.82 x 106 (12500) 1.00 x 106 (6900)
S3 0.180 (4.57) 2.23 x 106 (15400) 0.98 x 106 (6750)
S5 0.220 (5.59) 2.50 x 106 (17200) 0.96 x 106 (6600)
S7 0.260 (6.60) 2.68 x 106 (18500) 0.94 x 106 (6500)
S9 0.300 (7.62) 2.82 x 106 (19500) 0.93 x 106 (6400)
S11 0.340 (8.64) 2.92 x 106 (20100) 0.93 x 106 (6400)
S13 0.380 (9.65) 3.00 x 106 (20700) 0.92 x 106 (6350)
S15 0.420 (10.67) 3.10 x 106 (21400) 0.91 x 106 (6275)
S17 0.460 (11.68) 3.12 x 106 (21500) 0.91 x 106 (6275)
S19 0.500 (12.70) 3.17 x 106 (21900) 0.91 x 106 (6275)
S21 0.540 (13.72) 3.21 x 106 (22100) 0.90 x 106 (6200)
Table 5-- 7 Minimum Mechanical Properties of
Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates
Wall
Combination Bond Construction
Thickness
S1 0.140 (3.56) 4” (100 mm) – MRMM
S3 0.180 (4.57) 4” (100 mm) – MR, 5” (125 mm) – MRM
S5 0.220 (5.59) 4” (100 mm) – MR, 6” (150 mm) – MRMM
S7 0.260 (6.60) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRMM
S9 0.300 (7.62) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRMRM
S11 0.340 (8.64) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRMRM
S13 0.380 (9.65) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRM, 8” (200 mm) – MRM
S15 0.420 (10.67) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRM, 8” (200 mm) – MRMM
S17 0.460 (11.68) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRMR, 8” (200 mm) – MRMM
S19 0.500 (12.70) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRMR, 8” (200 mm) – MRMRM
S21 0.540 (13.72) 4” (100 mm) – MRM, 6” (150 mm) – MRMR, 8“ (200 mm) – MRMRMM
Table 5--8 Minimum Bond Construction for
Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates
NOTES:
a. Entire bond construction given in this table is to be placed on the exterior surface. Where possible, or for duct
diameters greater than 22 in. (550 mm), apply 6” (150 mm) MMVV on interior surface in addition to bonds
shown in this table.
b. Apply 2 in. (50 mm) wide veil first on exterior surface if no bond is applied on interior surface.
c. M = 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) Mat
d. R = 24 oz/yd2 (810 g/m2) Woven Roving

10 ft Support Span Round Duct Min. Safety Factor of 4.0
5.12
LAMINATES S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13
Diameter, in.
4 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
6 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
8 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
10 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
12 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
14 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
16 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ...
18 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ...
20 15.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ...
24 10.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ...
28 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ...
30 10.0 15.0 30.0 ... ... ... ...
32 5.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ...
36 5.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ...
42 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ...
48 5.0 5.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 ... ...
54 NR 5.0 10.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 ...
60 NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ...
66 NR 5.0 5.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 ...
72 NR 5.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 30.0
Table 5--9 Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in in. wg
NOTES:

c. To select Filament Wound (Type X) laminates for Positive pressure systems see section 5.2.4.
LAMINATES S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13
Diamter, mm
100 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
125 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
150 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
250 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
300 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
350 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
400 6250 7500 ... ... ... ... ...
450 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ...
500 3750 7500 ... ... ... ... ...
600 2500 6250 7500 ... ... ... ...
700 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ...
750 2500 3750 7500 ... ... ... ...
800 1250 3750 6250 7500 ... ... ...
900 1250 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ...
1050 1250 2500 3750 6250 7500 ... ...
1200 1250 1250 3750 5000 7500 ... ...
1350 NR 1250 2500 5000 6250 7500 ...
1500 NR 1250 2500 3750 6250 7500 ...
1650 NR 1250 1250 3750 5000 7500 ...

1800 NR 1250 1250 2500 3750 6250 7500
Table 5--9M Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in Pa
NOTES:
Pa but become economically less attractive with increasing thickness.
c. To select Filament Wound (Type X) laminates for Positive pressure systems see section 5.2.4.
5.13

CHAPTER 6
DESIGN OF
RECTANGULAR FRP DUCT
CHAPTER 6 DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR FRP DUCT
6.1 DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR FRP 6.1.3 Selection of Laminate Thickness for

DUCTS USING TYPE I AND II LAMI- Either Positive or Negative Pressure
NATES Systems
6.1.1 INTRODUCTION For the practical application of this chapter’s tables it

suffices to say that Tables 6-1 through 6-6 (Tables
The design procedures and fabrication requirements 6-1M through 6-6M) list the laminate thickness and
described in this chapter apply to rectangular FRP stiffener requirements for various rectangular duct
ducts, intended for positive and negative (vacuum) sizes, at three pressure levels: 10, 20, and 30 in. wg.
pressure systems, operating in corrosive environments (2500, 5000, and 7500 Pa). There are separate tables
at temperatures up to 180_F (82_C), and fabricated for positive and negative pressure systems.
from laminates based on thermoset polyester resins
having a heat deflection temperature (HDT) of 180_F Note: For a detailed discussion of the development of
(82_C) or higher. the design tables contained in this manual, the as-
sumptions and design concepts on which the ratings
Exception: Laminates fabricated from resin systems are based, and the testing program which validates the
having an HDT of less than 180_F (82_C) may be used results, see Appendix A.
to fabricate FRP ducts designed using the procedures
and tables contained in this manual provided that the The data in Tables 6-1 through 6-6 (Tables 6-1M
corrosion and operating temperature requirements of through 6-6M) is arranged starting with dimensions
the intended application can be met with the selected representing a rectangular duct listed in two contigu-
resin system. ous columns. The first column represents the longest
side and the second the short side. Duct sizes start at
Higher temperature applications require special pre- 12 in. (300 mm) by 6 in. (150 mm) and increase to 96
mium grade resins exhibiting HDT’s to suite the high- in. (2400 mm) square. Each series of duct sizes starts
er temperature requirements. Resin selection should with an incremental change in the longest–side col-
always be based on the resin manufacturer’s recom- umn and a series of alternative sizes in the short–side
mendation for the specific application or service. column, increasing progressively from the smallest
practical combination up to square. The table has a
fourth column which shows the maximum allowable
FRP ducts fabricated per the requirements of this chap- stiffener spacing for a particular duct size, when stiff-
ter, shall be fabricated by hand lay–up or contact mold- eners are required. A blank in the fourth column indi-
ing methods, using Types I and II laminates as de- cates that the corresponding duct combination is an
scribed in Chapter 3. unstiffened design.
Note: Filament Wound (Type X) rectangular ducts are Typically, before selecting the required laminate
not covered in this document. thickness for a particular application the system design
pressure (positive or negative), the duct size, and the
6.1.2 Minimum Laminate Physical Charac- laminate type are known.
teristics
6.1.3.1 Required Laminate Thickness
The number and sequence of fiberglass plies required
for each laminate type and thickness are listed in To select the required laminate thickness for an ap-
Tables 5-1 and 5-2 for laminates Type I and II, respec- plication, follow these steps:
tively. The minimum required physical characteristics
for both laminates are listed in Table 5-3. a. Based on the known system design pressure,
select the appropriate table. For positive pres-
The physical characteristics of the design laminate, on sure systems go to Tables 6-1 through 6-3
which the duct fabrication is predicated, must meet or (Tables 6-1M through 6-3M), and for ne-
exceed the minimum values listed in Table 5-3. Sub- gative pressure systems go to Tables 6-4
stantiation of laminate properties may be in the form through 6-6 (Tables 6-4M through 6-6M).
of current or historical test records for the laminate un-
der consideration. Tests supporting laminate proper- b. Enter the first column of the table and find a
ties must have been performed per the requirements of value that equals or exceeds the longest side
ASTM D638–96. of the rectangular duct.

c. Move to the second column and find a value (150 mm) wide layers of mat reinforcement
that equals or exceeds the short side of the are required at the corners for that particular
duct. duct size. This additional reinforcement is
centered along each corner of the duct, and
d. Move horizontally to the third column and is applied to the entire length of the section.
identify the required laminate thickness. This technique, to stiffen the corners, permits
the use of a lighter duct shell than would
Note: When selecting the required thickness otherwise be possible. (See Figure 6-1.)
for intermediate duct sizes, great care must be
exercised to always select the higher lami- 6.1.3.2 Laminate Construction and Minimum
nate thickness. Sometimes this corresponds to Required Mechanical Properties
the next higher duct size listed, and some-
times it may correspond to the nearest lower
size listed. Always select the heavier lami- To complete the selection of the basic construction re-
nate. quirements for FRP ducts, two additional pieces of in-
formation must be identified:
e. If your selection corresponds to an unstif-
fened design (blank space in fourth column), a. Laminate Reinforcement Sequence – From
you may want to consider a stiffened design Table 5-1 or 5-2, select the appropriate rein-
that will result in a lighter laminate thickness. forcement sequence for the required laminate
thickness previously selected from Tables
If so, identify the new required laminate 6-1 through 6-3 (Tables 6-1M through 6-3M)
thickness and note the listed maximum stiff- or Tables 6-4 through 6-6 (Tables 6-4M
ener spacing. To select the appropriate stiff- through 6-6M).
ener construction, go to section 6.2. Keep in
mind that the maximum stiffener spacing b. Minimum Required Mechanical Properties –
must be based on the required laminate thick- From Table 5-3, identify the minimum lami-
ness just selected. nate properties required to meet the design
ratings of Tables 6-1 through 6-3 (Tables
Note: An asterisk or two in the Shell–Thick- 6-1M through 6-3M) and Tables 6-4 through
ness column indicates that one or two 6 in. 6-6 (Tables 6-4M through 6-6M).

10 in. wg 2500 Pa
REQUIRED LAMINATE THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCT REQUIRED LAMINATE THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCT
DUCT SHELL STIFFENERS DUCT SHELL STIFFENERS
Longest Side Other Side Thickness Max. Spacing Longest Side Other Side Thickness Max. Spacing
in. in. in. in. mm mm mm mm
12 6 0.139 ------ 300 150 3.53 ------
12 8 0.139 ------ 300 200 3.53 ------

12 12 0.139 ------ 300 300 3.53 ------
16 8 0.139 ------ 400 200 3.53 ------
16 12 0.139 ------ 400 300 3.53 ------
16 16 0.139 ------ 400 400 3.53 ------
20 8 0.182 ------ 500 200 4.62 ------
20 12 0.182 ------ 500 300 4.62 ------
20 16 0.182 ------ 500 400 4.62 ------
20 20 0.182 ------ 500 500 4.62 ------
24 8 0.182 ------ 600 200 4.62 ------
24 12 0.182 ------ 600 300 4.62 ------
24 16 0.182 ------ 600 400 4.62 ------
24 24 0.182 ------ 600 600 4.62 ------
32 12 0.311 ------ 800 300 7.90 ------
32 18 0.311 ------ 800 450 7.90 ------
32 24 0.268 ------ 800 600 6.81 ------
32 32 0.225 ------ 800 800 5.72 ------
32 All Up To 18 0.268 54 800 All Up To 450 6.81 1350
32 All Up To Sq. 0.182 38 800 All Up To Sq. 4.62 950
36 12 0.311 ------ 900 300 7.90 ------
36 18 0.311 ------ 900 450 7.90 ------
36 24 0.311 ------ 900 600 7.90 ------
36 36 0.225 ------ 900 900 5.72 ------
36 All Up To 24 0.225 42 900 All Up To 600 5.72 1050
Table 6--1 Positive Design Pressure of 10 in. wg Table 6-- 1M Positive Design Pressure of 2500 Pa
6.3
NOTE: For Negative Pressure (vacuum) applications see Tables 6-4 through 6-6 (Tables 6-4M through 6-6M)
20 in. wg 5000 Pa
6.4
12 6 0.139 ------ 300 150 3.53 ------
12 8 0.139 ------ 300 200 3.53 ------
12 12 0.182 ------ 300 300 4.62 ------
16 8 0.182 ------ 400 200 4.62 ------
16 12 0.182 ------ 400 300 4.62 ------
16 16 0.225 ------ 400 400 5.72 ------
20 8 0.182 ------ 500 200 4.62 ------
20 12 0.182 ------ 500 300 4.62 ------
20 16 0.182* ------ 500 400 4.62* ------

20 20 0.182* ------ 500 500 4.62* ------
24 8 0.225 ------ 600 200 5.72 ------
24 12 0.225 ------ 600 300 5.72 ------
24 16 0.225 ------ 600 400 5.72 ------
24 24 0.225* ------ 600 600 5.72* ------
32 12 0.397 ------ 800 300 10.08 ------
32 18 0.397 ------ 800 450 10.08 ------
32 24 0.354 ------ 800 600 8.99 ------
32 32 0.354* ------ 800 800 8.99* ------
36 12 0.483 ------ 900 300 12.27 ------
36 18 0.483 ------ 900 450 12.27 ------
36 24 0.483 ------ 900 600 12.27 ------
36 36 0.397* ------ 900 900 10.08* ------
36 All Up To 24 0.397 42 900 All Up To 600 10.08 1050
60 All Up To Sq. 0.440* 42 1500 All Up To Sq. 11.18* 1050
NOTES:
a. For Negative Pressure (vacuum) applications see Tables 6-4 through 6-6 (Tables 6-4M through 6-6M)
b. Ducts marked (*) require an additional 6” (150 mm) wide ply fiberglass mat centered along each of the four corners of the duct section.
30 in. wg 7500 Pa
REQUIRED LAMINATE THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTS REQUIRED LAMINATE THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTS
Longest Side Other Side Thickness Max. Spacing LongestSide Other Side Thickness Max. Spacing
12 6 0.182 ------ 300 150 4.62 ------
12 8 0.182 ------ 300 200 4.62 ------

12 12 0.182 ------ 300 300 4.62 ------
16 8 0.225 ------ 400 200 5.72 ------
16 12 0.225 ------ 400 300 5.72 ------
16 16 0.225* ------ 400 400 5.72* ------
20 8 0.225* ------ 500 200 5.72* ------
20 12 0.225* ------ 500 300 5.72* ------
20 16 0.225* ------ 500 400 5.72* ------
20 20 0.268* ------ 500 500 6.81* ------
24 8 0.311 ------ 600 200 7.90 ------
24 12 0.311 ------ 600 300 7.90 ------
24 16 0.311 ------ 600 400 7.90 ------
24 24 0.311* ------ 600 600 7.90* ------
32 12 0.483 ------ 800 300 12.27 ------
32 18 0.483 ------ 800 450 12.27 ------
32 24 0.440 ------ 800 600 11.18 ------
32 32 0.440* ------ 800 800 11.18* ------
36 12 0.569 ------ 900 300 14.45 ------
36 18 0.569 ------ 900 450 14.45 ------
36 24 0.569 ------ 900 600 14.45 ------
36 36 0.569 ------ 900 900 14.45 ------
NOTES:
a. For Negative Pressure (vacuum) applications see Tables 6-4 through 6-6 (Tables 6-4M through 6-6M)
6.5
10 in. wg 2500 Pa
6.6
12 6 0.139 ------ 300 150 3.53 ------
12 8 0.139 ------ 300 200 3.53 ------
12 12 0.139 ------ 300 300 3.53 ------
16 8 0.139 ------ 400 200 3.53 ------
16 12 0.139 ------ 400 300 3.53 ------
16 16 0.139 ------ 400 400 3.53 ------
20 8 0.182 ------ 500 200 4.62 ------
20 12 0.182 ------ 500 300 4.62 ------
20 16 0.182 ------ 500 400 4.62 ------

20 20 0.182 ------ 500 500 4.62 ------
24 8 0.182 ------ 600 200 4.62 ------
24 12 0.182 ------ 600 300 4.62 ------
24 16 0.182 ------ 600 400 4.62 ------
24 24 0.225 ------ 600 600 5.72 ------
32 12 0.268 ------ 800 300 6.81 ------
32 18 0.268 ------ 800 450 6.81 ------
32 24 0.268 ------ 800 600 6.81 ------
32 32 0.268 ------ 800 800 6.81 ------
36 12 0.311 ------ 900 300 7.90 ------
36 18 0.311 ------ 900 450 7.90 ------
36 24 0.311 ------ 900 600 7.90 ------
36 36 0.311 ------ 900 900 7.90 ------
36 All Up To Sq. 0.225 42 900 All Up To 600 5.72 1050
Table 6-- 4 Negative Design Pressure of 10 in. wg Table 6-- 4M Negative Design Pressure of 2500 Pa
NOTE: For Positive Pressure applications see Tables 6-1 through 6-3 (Tables 6-1M through 6-3M)
20 in. wg 5000 Pa
Longest Side Other Side Thickness Max Spacing Longest Side Other Side Thickness Max. Spacing
12 6 0.139 ------ 300 150 3.53 ------
12 8 0.139 ------ 300 200 3.53 ------

12 12 0.182 ------ 300 300 4.62 ------
16 8 0.182 ------ 400 200 4.62 ------
16 12 0.182 ------ 400 300 4.62 ------
16 16 0.225 ------ 400 400 5.72 ------
20 8 0.225 ------ 500 200 5.72 ------
20 12 0.225 ------ 500 300 5.72 ------
20 16 0.225 ------ 500 400 5.72 ------
20 20 0.225* ------ 500 500 5.72* ------
24 8 0.268 ------ 600 200 6.81 ------
24 12 0.268 ------ 600 300 6.81 ------
24 16 0.268 ------ 600 400 6.81 ------
24 24 0.268* ------ 600 600 6.81* ------
32 12 0.354 ------ 800 300 8.99 ------
32 18 0.354 ------ 800 450 8.99 ------
32 24 0.354 ------ 800 600 8.99 ------
32 32 0.354* ------ 800 800 8.99* ------
36 12 0.440 ------ 900 300 11.18 ------
36 18 0.440 ------ 900 450 11.18 ------
36 24 0.440 ------ 900 600 11.18 ------
36 36 0.440 ------ 900 900 11.18 ------
NOTES: a. For Positive Pressure applications see Tables 6-1 through 6-3 (Tables 6-1M through 6-3M)
6.7
30 in. wg 7500 Pa
6.8
12 6 0.139 ------ 300 150 3.53 ------
12 8 0.139 ------ 300 200 3.53 ------
12 12 0.182 ------ 300 300 5.72 ------
16 8 0.225 ------ 400 200 5.72 ------
16 12 0.225 ------ 400 300 5.72 ------
16 16 0.225* ------ 400 400 5.72* ------
20 8 0.268 ------ 500 200 6.81 ------
20 12 0.268 ------ 500 300 6.81 ------
20 16 0.268* ------ 500 400 6.81* ------

20 20 0.268* ------ 500 500 6.81* ------
24 8 0.311 ------ 600 200 7.90 ------
24 12 0.311 ------ 600 300 7.90 ------
24 16 0.311* ------ 600 400 7.90* ------
24 24 0.311** ------ 600 600 7.90** ------
32 12 0.440 ------ 800 300 11.18 ------
32 18 0.440 ------ 800 450 11.18 ------
32 24 0.440 ------ 800 600 11.18 ------
32 32 0.440* ------ 800 800 11.18* ------
36 12 0.526 ------ 900 300 13.36 ------
36 18 0.526 ------ 900 450 13.36 ------
36 24 0.526 ------ 900 600 13.36 ------
36 36 0.526* ------ 900 900 13.36* ------
NOTES: a. For Positive Pressure applications see Tables 6-1 through 6-3 (Tables 6-1M through 6-3M)
c. Ducts marked (**) require two additional 6” (150 mm) wide plies fiberglass mat centered along each of the four corners of the duct section.
6.2 SELECTION OF STIFFENERS AND 6.2.2 Selection of Stiffeners for Rectangu-
FLANGES FOR RECTANGULAR lar Duct Systems
DUCT SYSTEMS
If the chosen design from section 6.1.3 requires stiff-
6.2.1 Introduction eners, follow these steps for stiffener selection:
Two basic stiffener designs can be considered for rec- a. Based on the system design pressure and
tangular FRP ducts using Type II laminate construc- maximum allowable stiffener spacing, select
tion for bonding the stiffener “ribs” to the FRP duct the appropriate stiffener table.
shell:
Note: For each stiffener the maximum allowable span
a. Wood stiffener with 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) FRP corresponding to each of the three design criteria are
bond
listed. The value governing the design is the lower of
the three and is bolded to simplify identification.
b. Semi–circular foam filler with 1/4 in. (6.4
mm) FRP bond
b. Enter the appropriate table and find a suitable
Note: Other structural shapes of composite materials stiffener having a maximum stiffener span
having equivalent structural properties as those shown that exceeds the largest panel width (longest
side) of the rectangular duct. (The same stiff-
on Tables 6-8 through 6-10 (Tables 6-8M through
ener construction shall be used for both, the
6-10M) may be substituted.
long and the short sides of the duct.)
(However, because of the difference in thermal expan-
sion characteristics between metals and FRP, and the 6.2.3 Selection of Flanges for Rectangular
possible corrosion problems they engender, metal Ducts
structural shapes are not recommended for stiffening
FRP duct.) Flanges shall be fabricated per the requirements of this
section, including Table 6-7, Figure 6-5, and any appli-
The stiffener tables cover three pressure levels 10, 20, cable requirements from Chapter 7. Within the limits
and 30 in. wg (2500, 5000, and 7500 Pa), each table is indicated in the tables, flanges for rectangular FRP
valid for both positive and negative pressure. The ducts shall be fabricated from Type II laminates only.
tables list the maximum allowable span for each stiff-
ener, based on three different design criteria: stress less To select appropriate flange details for a specific ap-
than or equal to 2300 psi (333.6 kPa), a panel deflec- plication, refer to Table 6-7. Corresponding to the lon-
tion less than or equal to 3/4 in. (19.1 mm) or L/120, gest side of the duct in question, select values for each
whichever is least. Within each pressure level there are of the dimensions referenced in Figure 6-5. To finalize
separate tables for stiffener intervals (spacing) of 30, the flange details, follow the notes to Figure 6-5. The
36, 42, 48, and 54 in. (750, 900, 1050, 1200, and 1350 same flange dimensions selected for the long side of
mm). the duct are also applicable to the short side.

3” (75 mm)
RADIUS ALL CORNERS PER

SCHEDULE IN SECTION 7.12
RADIUS = 1/2” (12.7 mm) MINIMUM
APPLY BOND CONSISTING OF ONE OR MORE 6”

(150 mm) WIDE PLIES OF MAT, CENTERED OVER EACH
CORNER WHEN REQUIRED.
SEE TABLES 6.1 THROUGH 6.6 (6.1M THROUGH 6.6M)
FIGURE 6--1 CORNER REINFORCEMENT DETAIL

1/4” (6.4 mm) FRP BOND
2” x 4” (50 x 100 mm)

WOOD, STRUCTURAL
GRADE NO. 1
3” (75 mm) 3” (75 mm)
TWO – 2” x 4” (50 x 100 mm)

WOOD, STRUCTURAL
GRADE NO.1
3” (75 mm) 3” (75 mm)
4” x 4” (100 x 100 mm)

WOOD, STRUCTURAL
GRADE NO. 1
3” (75 mm) 3” (75 mm)
FIGURE 6--2 WOOD STIFFENERS WITH FRP BOND

DETAIL “A”
DETAIL “A”
WHEN USING WOOD AS THE FORM FOR

LAMINATING FRP STIFFENERS, THE
CORNERS MAY BE BUTTED OR MITERED
AND NAILED OR SCREWED AT THE
ELECTION OF THE DUCT FABRICATOR
FIGURE 6-- 3 CONSTRUCTION OF TRANSVERSE STIFFENERS

2” (50 mm) RADIUS
FOAM OR OTHER
FILLER
3” (75 mm) 3” (75 mm)

2 1/2” (63.5 mm) RADIUS
FOAM OR OTHER
FILLER
T
3” (75 mm) 3” (75 mm)

3” (75 mm) RADIUS
FOAM OR OTHER
FILLER
T
3” (75 mm) 3” (75 mm)
NOTE:
FILLER DOES NOT CONTRIBUTE TO THE STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES OF THE STIFFENER.
IT IS ONLY INTENDED TO PROVIDE A SHAPE FOR LAMINATING
FIGURE 6--4 SEMI–CIRCULAR FOAM STIFFENERS WITH FRP BOND

Longest Side Max. Bolt Minimum Equivalent
a b tf
Dimension Spacing Bolt Size Metric Bolt
12 (300) 2 (51) 2 (51) 0.215 (5.46) 4 (100) 1/4 M6
16 (400) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.291 (7.39) 4 (100) 3/8 M8
20 (500) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.367 (9.32) 4 (100) 3/8 M8
24 (600) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.410 (10.41) 4 (100) 1/2 M10
32 (800) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.410 (10.41) 4 (100) 1/2 M10
36 (900) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.486 (12.34) 4 (100) 1/2 M10
42 (1050) 3 (75) 3 (75) 0.486 (12.34) 4 (100) 1/2 M10
48 (1225) 4 (100) 3 (75) 0.562 (14.27) 5 (125) 1/2 M12
54 (1375) 4 (100) 3 (75) 0.562 (14.27) 5 (125) 1/2 M12
60 (1525) 4 (100) 3 (75) 0.638 (16.21) 5 (125) 1/2 M12
72 (1825) 4 (100) 3 (75) 0.638 (16.21) 5 (125) 1/2 M12
84 (2150) 4 (100) 3 (75) 0.681 (17.29) 5 (125) 1/2 M12
96 (2450) 4 (100) 3 (75) 0.681 (17.29) 5 (125) 1/2 M12
Table 6--7 Minimum Flange Dimensions For Rectangular Duct
BOLT HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED tf
b
tf
c
td
a
NOTES:
1. ALL FLANGE CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE TYPE II LAMINATES. (THE FLANGE THICKNESS (tf) LISTED
IN TABLE 5--5 IS BASED ON TYPE II LAMINATES.)
2. DIMENSION c SHALL BE 40 to 50% OF DIMENSION b
3. DIMENSIONS a, b, and tf ARE CONSIDERED MINIMUMS. LARGER, HEAVIER FLANGES ARE ACCEPTABLE
WITH OWNER’S APPROVAL.
4. MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR BOLTS SHALL EQUAL OR EXCEED THOSE OF A307 TYPE BOLTS OR ISO
4017/4014 8.8 FOR METRIC BOLTS.
FIGURE 6--5 FRP FLANGE DETAILS


SECTION MOMENT OF
STIFFENER DESCRIPTION
MODULUS, in3 INERTIA, in4
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 7.5 19.5
Two 2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 12.2 29.4
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 13.7 32.6
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 1.8 3.6
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 2.7 6.3
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 3.7 10.2
STIFFENER SPACING @ 54 in.

ALLOWABLE STRESS DEFLECTION DEFLECTION
Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in. ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 94.1 103.6 108.5
Two 2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 120.0 114.8 124.5
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 127.2 117.8 128.8
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 45.8 67.8 61.7
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 56.0 78.2 74.7
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 66.1 88.1 87.5

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in. ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 99.9 106.6 112.8
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 134.9 121.3 134.0
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 48.6 69.8 64.2
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 59.4 80.6 77.7
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 70.1 90.8 91.0
NOTES:
a) All wood dimensions in stiffener description column are nominal
b) Maximum Allowable Span is bolded for easy identification
Table 6--8 Maximum Allowable Stiffener Span in in.

for Positive or Negative Pressure of 10 in. wg

SECTION MOMENT OF
MODULUS, mm3 INERTIA, mm4
50 mm x 100 mm wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 123,150 8,098,600
Two 50 mm x 100 mm wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 200,000 12,240,950
100 mm x 100mm wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 224,850 13,558,300
50 mm rad. foam + 6.4 mm FRP bond 29,150 1,490,100
STIFFENER SPACING @ 1350 mm

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
50 mm x 100 mm wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 2391 2630 2756
Two 50 mm x 100 mm wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 3047 2916 3163
100 mm x 100mm wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 3231 2992 3272
50 mm rad. foam + 6.4 mm FRP bond 1164 1723 1567

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
NOTES:
Table 6-- 8M Maximum Allowable Stiffener Span in mm

for Positive or Negative Pressure of 2500 Pa

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in. ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 106.7 110.3 118.0
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 144.2 125.4 140.1
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 52.0 72.2 67.1
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 63.5 83.3 81.2
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 74.9 93.8 95.2

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in. ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 115.3 114.6 124.2
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 155.8 130.4 147.5
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 56.1 75.1 70.6
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 68.6 86.6 85.5
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 80.9 97.5 100.2

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in. ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 126.3 119.9 132.0
Two 2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond88 161.0 133.0 151.5
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 170.7 136.4 156.7
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 61.5 78.6 75.1
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 75.1 90.6 90.8
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 88.6 102.1 106.5

NOTES:

for Positive or Negative Pressure of 10 in. wg – (continued)

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

NOTES:

for Positive or Negative Pressure of 2500 Pa – (continued)

SECTION MOMENT OF
MODULUS, in.3 INERTIA, in.4
2”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 7.5 19.457
Two 2”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 12.2 29.409
4”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 13.7 32.574
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 1.8 3.58
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 2.7 6.34
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 3.7 10.21

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 66.6 87.1 86.1
Two 2”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 84.8 96.5 98.8
4”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 89.9 99.0 102.3
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 32.4 57.0 49.0
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 39.6 65.8 59.3
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 46.7 74.1 69.5

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 70.6 89.7 89.6
Two 2”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 90.0 99.4 102.8
4”x4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 95.4 102.0 106.3
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 34.4 58.7 50.9
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 42.0 67.8 61.6
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 49.5 76.3 72.2
NOTES:


SECTION MOMENT OF

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
NOTES:


Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 75.5 92.7 93.6
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 102.0 105.5 111.2
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 36.7 60.7 53.3
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 44.9 70.1 64.4
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 53.0 78.9 75.5

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 81.5 96.4 98.6
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 110.2 109.6 117.1
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 39.7 63.1 56.1
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 48.5 72.8 67.8
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 57.2 82.0 79.5

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 89.3 100.9 104.8
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 120.7 114.7 124.4
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 43.5 66.1 59.6
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 53.1 76.2 72.1
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 62.7 85.8 84.5

NOTES:
Table 6--9 Allowable Stiffener Span in in.


Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
NOTES:
Table 6-- 9M Maximum Allowable Stiffener Spans in mm


SECTION MOMENT OF
MODULUS, in3 INERTIA, in4
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 7.5 19.457
Two 2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 12.2 29.409
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 13.7 32.574
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 1.8 3.58
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 2.7 6.34
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 3.7 10.21

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 54.4 78.7 75.2
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 73.4 89.5 89.3
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 26.5 51.5 42.8
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 32.3 59.4 51.8
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 38.1 67.0 60.7

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 57.7 81.0 78.2
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 77.9 92.2 92.9
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 28.1 53.1 44.5
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 34.3 61.2 53.8
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 40.5 69.0 63.1
NOTES:
Table 6-- 10 Maximum Allowable Stiffener Span in in.


SECTION MOMENT OF

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
NOTES:


Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 61.6 83.8 81.8
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 83.3 95.3 97.1
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 30.0 54.9 46.5
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 36.7 63.3 56.3
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 43.2 71.3 66.0

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 66.6 87.1 86.1
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 89.9 99.0 102.3
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 32.4 57.0 49.0
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 39.6 65.8 59.3
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 46.7 74.1 69.5

Fb ± 2300 psi ± 3/4 in ± L/120
2” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 72.9 91.1 91.5
4” x 4” wood + 1/4” FRP bond 98.5 103.7 108.7
2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 35.5 59.7 52.0
2 1/2” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 43.4 68.9 63.0
3” rad. foam + 1/4” FRP bond 51.2 77.6 73.8
NOTES:
Table 6-- 10 Maximum Allowable Stiffener Span in in.


Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
50 mm x 100 m wood + 6.4 mm FRP bond 1691 2212 2187

Fb ± 15900 kPa ± 19 mm ± L/120
NOTES:



CHAPTER 7
REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 7 REQUIREMENTS
7.1 TERMINOLOGY 7.7 RAW EDGES
Unless otherwise indicated, the plastics terminology All cut edges, drilled holes, and spot faces shall be
used in this manual shall be in accordance with the def- coated with catalyzed resin containing wax, and UV
initions given in ASTM D883. additives if duct systems may be exposed to weather-
ing. To prevent chemical attack, voids and crevices
7.2 CONTACT MOLDING shall be filled and sealed so that no glass fibers are ex-
posed.
Includes the application of glass plies in sheet form by
the hand lay–up and spray–up methods of fabrication. 7.8 JOINTS (WELDS OR BONDS)
Fiberglass roving is chopped and blown onto the mold.
Finished joints shall be built up with successive layers
The resin can be sprayed or poured and brushed, and
of FRP and be as strong as the pieces being joined.
rolled to wet the fiber and eliminate air void entrap-
Crevices between joined pieces shall be filled with a
ment.
thixotropic paste, leaving a smooth inner surface.
Where required, the interior of the joint shall be cov-
7.3 MATERIALS
ered with two plies of mat and finished with one layer
of veil and one coat of paraffinated resin. The weld
Resin shall be a commercial–grade thermoset that has shall be centered on the joint within 1/2 in. (12.7 mm).
been tested in accordance with ASTM C581 or that has Gaps between duct ends shall be as close as possible
been previously documented to be acceptable for the but in no case exceed 3/8 in. (9.5 mm). See Tables 5-8
service conditions. Where no test or service informa- and 7-5 for minimum bond construction.
tion is available, the end user shall agree to select a
suitable resin with the fabricator. 7.9 LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION
The resin may contain fillers or thixotropic agents as Laminate construction shall be generally as described
approved by the resin manufacturer. When required, in Chapter 3. More specifically, laminate construction
fire retardant synergists may also be added to the resin shall follow the lay–up sequence corresponding to the
to reduce flame spread. standard laminate compositions for Types I and II lam-
inates, as listed in Tables 5-1 and 5-2, or in Table 5-6
7.4 STORAGE for Filament Wound (Type X) laminates.
All resin, glass reinforcement, and curing agents sup- 7.9.1 Appearance
plied for joining FRP duct in the field, must be stored
in a clean, dry, cool area to maximize their shelf life. The corrosion barrier laminate shall be free of visual
defects, such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, air
7.5 STATIC ELECTRICITY bubbles, pinholes, pimples, and delamination as de-
fined by ASTM–2563, Level II. The remainder of the
Grounding requirements, if any, shall be determined laminate (outer structural portion) shall be free of visu-
by the end–user and the FRP duct fabricator. al defects to the extent commercially practicable. Ad-
ditionally, the exterior surface shall be smooth and res-
7.6 REINFORCEMENT in rich with no dry fibers visible. All raw cuts shall be
resin coated to prevent moisture absorption. (See sec-
tion 7.7.)
The reinforcing material shall be a commercial grade
of glass with a suitable binder, and sizing compatible
7.9.2 Surface Hardness
with the resin to be used.
The laminate shall exhibit an average surface hardness
These symbols are used to represent different types of of at least 90% of the resin manufacturer’s published
glass reinforcement: Barcol hardness for the cured resin. (See section 8.1.4
for detailed requirements and test methods.)
M = 1–1/2 oz/ft2 (450 g/m2) chopped strand mat
Exception: Laminate surfaces finished with synthetic
R = 24 oz/yd2 (810 g/m2) woven roving veil and resin are considered adequately cured when
the average hardness, established as described above,
V = veil – glass or synthetic, 0.010 in./ply equals or exceeds 80% of the Barcol hardness value es-
(0.25 mm/ply) calculated thickness tablished by the resin manufacturer for the cured resin.

7.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS more details on methodology for establishing
average thickness, and thickness limits.)
Minimum duct specifications shall be in accordance
with the requirements of either Chapter 5 – Design of 7.11 OVERLAP
Round FRP Duct or Chapter 6 – Design of Rectangular
All reinforcing materials shall be layed–up staggered,
FRP Duct.
such that adjoining plies overlap by 1/2 in. (15 mm)
minimum with respect to the overlap of preceding
NOTE: Duct design does not include consideration of
plies.
wind, snow, ice, maintenance, or seismic loads. Nor
does it include loads resulting from the accumulation 7.12 RECTANGULAR DUCT CORNERS
of particulates, condensate, or other liquids (e.g.
sprinkler water). Interior corners shall be formed to a radius based on the
following schedule:
7.10.1 Dimensions
Widest Adjoining Panel Corner Radius
Standard duct and fitting dimensions are based on in- in. (mm) in. (mm)
side dimensions.
24 (600) and under 0.500 (15)
7.10.2 Shop Drawings and Design Calcula- 25 to 48 (625 to 1200) 1.0 (25)
tions 49 (1225) and larger 1.5 (40)
FRP duct and hoods shall be fabricated in accordance When required by the notes to Tables 6-1 through 6-6
with the design and construction details shown in shop (6-1M through 6-6M), one or more 6 in. (150 mm)
drawings and design calculations as approved by the wide layers of fiberglass mat are bonded with resin to
purchaser. each of the four corners of the duct for improved rigid-
ity. This additional layer (or layers) of reinforcement
7.10.3 Required Laminate Thickness are centered over each corner, and extend the full
length of the duct section. (See Table Figure 6-1.)
Required laminate thickness is defined as the thick-
ness obtained from Tables 5-4 (5-4M) or 5-6 for round 7.13 BOND CONSTRUCTION
ducts, and Tables 6-1 through 6-3 (6-1M through
The bond construction for field–wrapping duct joints
6-3M) for rectangular ducts.
shall use the same type of resin used in fabricating the
duct, and shall follow the same lay–up sequence to
Nominal laminate thickness is the thickness of a stan-
produce a bond thickness at least equal to that speci-
dard laminate that equals or exceeds the required lami-
fied for the duct and exhibit a minimum taper of 6:1.
nate thickness. Nominal thickness for standard lami-
(See Table 7-5 and Figure 7-6.)
nate compositions of Types I and II laminates are listed
in Tables 5-1 and 5-2. For laminate combinations of Exception: When joining filament wound duct, the
filament wound (Type X) laminates the corresponding lay–up sequence shall be based on a special Type II
nominal thickness are listed in Table 5-6. laminate composition designed to meet or exceed the
strength of the filament wound duct. (See Table 5-8 for
7.10.4 Laminate Thickness Tolerance specific requirements.)
To meet the requirements of this manual, a laminate 7.14 FLANGE REQUIREMENTS

must:
7.14.1 Flange Construction
S Contain the required number of layers of
Flange construction shall be Type I (small round duct
glass as listed in Tables 5-1 and 5-2 for Types
only, see Figure 5-1) or Type II, hand laid–up in accor-
I and II laminates, or Table 5-6 for filament
dance with Tables 5-5 or 6-7. Use of other types of
wound (Type X).
flanges must be approved by the end user.
S Exhibit an average thickness not less than 7.14.2 Flange–on–Duct Attachment
85%, nor more than 120%, of the required
thickness, based on the average of six read- The same inner surface and interior layer of a flange,
ings taken at random. (See section 8.1.5 for in a flange–on–duct attachment, must continue onto

the flange face as for an “integral” flange. (See Figure steel hardware may be used. For more severely corro-
7-5.) sive atmospheres, the hardware shall be stainless steel
or other corrosion resistant material.
7.14.3 Flange Sealing & Gasket Materials
7.15 STANDARD ELBOWS AND MITERED
Flange sealing shall be vapor tight at the design pres- JOINTS
sure using a full face, one–piece gasket of suitable
durometer hardness (60 min. hardness), that is com- Standard elbows, over 3 in. (75 mm) diameter shall
patible with the chemical environment (as agreed to by have a center line radius of 1–1/2 times the duct diame-
the end user) and torqued to the recommended tight- ter. On all elbows 24 in. (610 mm) diameter and under,
ness as indicated below: mitered joints are not permitted, except when more
room is required for bolting.
Bolt Size Recommended Torque

in. (mm) ft–lb (Nm) 7.16 FITTING CONFIGURATION
1/4 (M6) 6 (8.1)
Fitting design should conform to SMACNA’s HVAC
5/16 (M8) 12 (16.3)
Systems Duct Design to ensure the most energy effi-
3/8 (M10) 22 (29.8) cient air flow. FRP duct and fittings friction loss may
1/2 (M12) 50 (67.8) be estimated assuming the same friction factor and
loss coefficients listed for sheet metal duct and fittings
in SMACNA’S HVAC Systems Duct Design.
When properly installed, the gasket shall not protrude
into the inside duct surface by more than 1/8 in. (3 mm)
nor shall the gasket form a cavity below the internal 7.17 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
duct surface of more than 1/8 in. (3 mm).
All ducts have been designed for a maximum support
Flange gaskets shall be of sufficient thickness and span of 10 ft (3050 mm). Figure 7-28 illustrates accept-
durometer hardness to properly seal the joint and shall able methods of supporting horizontal duct. Ducts
meet minimum thickness of 1/8 in. (3 mm) thick for shall also be supported independently at hoods, fans,
duct dimensions up through 24 in. (610 mm) diameter, tanks, or other equipment and on both sides of an ex-
and 3/16 in. (5 mm) for ducts over 24 in. (610 mm). pansion or flexible joint. Heavy accessories, such as
Pieced gaskets shall be smooth and closely fitted to filters, dampers, etc., shall also be independently sup-
form a tight seal of the joint. ported to avoid local overstressing of the duct.
7.14.4 Flange Holes Note: Duct design does not include consideration of
wind, snow, ice, maintenance, or seismic loads. Nor
Flange holes shall be drilled with a pattern based on does it include loads resulting from the accumulation
Tables 5-5 and 6-7, with bolt holes straddling major of particulates, condensate, or other liquids (e.g.
center lines unless otherwise specified. Hole sides sprinkler water).
shall be coated with catalyzed resin as per the require-
ments of section 7.7. Hangers and supports shall be securely fastened to the
building or structure. Care shall be taken in supporting
7.14.5 Flange Bolting the duct to avoid creating conditions of stress on the
material in the finished installation. Figure 7-29 illus-
Unless otherwise specified, the bolt size and spacing trates a recommended method of supporting a vertical
of bolt holes shall be in accordance with Tables 5-5 and duct run. In locations where hangers are exposed to
6-7. Flat washers shall be used under both the bolt head corrosive atmosphere (adjacent to hoods, tanks, or oth-
and nut to prevent damage of the FRP surface when er process equipment), hanger materials and attaching
tightened. hardware shall be stainless steel or steel with a suitable
protective coating.
Materials for bolts, nuts, and washers, as used for non–
corrosive external conditions, shall be selected to In locations not subject to corrosive fumes, hangers
withstand the atmospheric conditions of the area. Gen- and attaching hardware may be fabricated of prime
erally, cadmium plated or other suitably protected coated or galvanized steel.

Tables 7-1 through 7-4 provide basic information for
the selection of simple split–ring, strap, and trapeze
type hangers for round and rectangular ducts.
Duct Diameter, in. (mm) Strap Size, in. (mm)

22 (560 mm) and under 2 x 1/8 (50 x 3.2)
23 to 60 (580 to 1500 mm) 3 x 3/16 (75 x 4.8)
61 (1525 mm) and above 4 x 3/16 (100 x 4.8)
Table 7--1 Minimum Strap Sizes for Round Duct
Note: Specific applications which involve large axial duct displacements (i.e. thermal expansion and contraction) or
vibration may require the addition of wear plates at hangers and supports.
Laminate Thickness, in. (mm) 0.125 (3.2) 0.188 (4.8) 0.250 (6.4) 0.375 (9.5) 0.500 (12.7)
Weight Per Unit Area
1.2 (5.9) 1.8 (8.8) 2.3 (11.2) 3.5 (17.1) 4.7 (22.9)
lb/ft2 (kg/m2)
Table 7--2 Weight of FRP Laminates
Notes:
a. The weights listed above are recommended for estimating duct weight for the selection of hangers and sup-
ports. They are based on a density of 112.3 lb/ft3 (1800 kg/m3). The density of FRP laminates varies from
85 to 120 lb/ft3 (1362 to 1922 kg/m3).
b. When estimating the weight of stiffened rectangular FRP Ducts, add 3.0 to 4.0 lb/ft (4.5 to 6.0 kg/m) of Foam
Core Stiffener (RIB), or 4.5 to 7.5 lb/ft (6.7 to 10.4 kg/m) of Wood Core Stiffener (RIB) to the weight of the
basic duct.
c. When working in metric units, multiply the duct weight (mass) in kilograms by the acceleration of gravity
(g = 9.8 m/sec2) to convert mass to force in Newtons (N).

HANGER ROD
HANGER ROD
L = DISTANCE BETWEEN
HANGER RODS, in. (m)
P = SUPPORT LOAD, Kips (N)

1 Kip = 1000 lbs
FIGURE 7--1 TRAPEZE ANGLE WITH HANGER RODS
P x L (Max.)
Angle size in. (mm)
Kip–in. (Nm)
1 x 1 x 1/8 (25.4 x 25.4 x 3.2) 1.9 (210)
1–1/2 x 1–1/2 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 3.2) 4.3 (480)
2 x 2 x 1/8 (51 x 51 x 3.2) 7.9 (870)
2 x 2 x 3/16 (51 x 51 x 4.8) 11.4 (1270)
2 x 2 x 1/4 (51 x 51 x 6.4) 14.8 (1650)
2–1/2 x 2–1/2 x 1/4 (63.5 x 63.5 x 6.4) 22.9 (2540)
3 x 3 x 1/4 (76 x 76 x 6.4) 34.6 (3850)
4 x 4 x 1/4 (102 x 102 x 6.4) 63.0 (7010)
4 x 4 x 3/8 (102 x 102 x 9.5) 91.2 (10150)
Table 7-- 3 Trapeze Angle Support Capacity
Notes:
a. Material is assumed to be hot rolled ASTM A36 equal leg angles, oriented as shown on Figure 7-1.
b. Support Capacity is based on a maximum bending stress of 15,000 psi (103 MPa).
c. For additional help with Support selection, refer to SMACNA’S HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal
and Flexible) or Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards for more extensive sections on hangers and
supports.

Rod Diameter Maximum Allowable Load
in. (mm) lb (kN)
1/4 (6.4) 240 (1.07)
5/16 (7.9) 380 (1.69)
3/8 (9.6) 610 (2.71)
1/2 (12.7) 1330 (5.03)
5/8 (15.8) 1810 (8.05)
3/4 (19.0) 2710 (12.05)
Table 7--4 Hanger Rod (ATR) Capacity
Notes:
a. Above ratings are based on ATR (All Threaded Rod) made from ASTM A36, A575 GR1020, or A576 GR
1020.
b. Ratings are consistent with SP–58, 1993 Edition by Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry, Inc.
c. Ratings are based on an allowable tensile stress of 9000 psi (62 MPa) calculated on the root cross–sectional
area of the thread.
d. To rate threaded materials other than those listed in a. (above) refer to SP–58, 1993 Edition.
7.18 FUME HOODS ticle size. This specific information, as related to cor-
rosive contaminates, can be found in industry design
Fume hoods are designed to capture and remove haz- guidelines such as the one published by “The Ameri-
ardous fumes from a specific work area. Hoods can Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygie-
manufactured from FRP laminates generally follow nists.”
the same guidelines as their metal counterparts. Cap-
ture velocity, contaminate removal, and flow rate fol- Keeping hoods away from external air influences al-
low the same design principles as other hoods. lows for the most efficient system. Exterior doors, air
conditioning inlets and outlets, or equipment move-
Two types of hoods commonly fabricated from FRP ment in close proximity to the hoods can cause a well
are: a) enclosing, and b) canopy designs. Enclosing designed system to exhaust poorly. Locate hoods in an
hoods are partially or completely enclosed and rely on area with the least amount of external air disturbances.
slot velocity to capture and remove the contaminates. (See Appendix E, Referenced Documents.)
They can be a) a back–draft design used for open tanks,
b) fully enclosed laboratory hoods, c) finger hoods for 7.19 DAMPERS
large vessels or d) push–pull designs where large sur-
face areas need to be exhausted. Canopy hoods are 7.19.1 Volume Dampers
used overhead for large open vessels and rely on a
combination of thermal vaporization and the exhaust Volume dampers shall be installed at the locations spe-
flow rate to remove the contaminates. The type of cified by the project drawings for balancing and ad-
hood needed is determined by its exact use and the justment of the system. Acceptable damper construc-
emissions that are to be removed from the area. The in- tion techniques are illustrated in Figures 7-31 and
dustrial process, access to the vessel and appropriate 7-32. Construction shall be such as to eliminate drip-
personnel safety will dictate the fume hood best suited ping of condensate from duct penetrations. Volume
for the application. dampers shall be provided with suitable corrosion–
proof attachments for permanently setting dampers in
Hood flow rates and capture velocities necessary to a fixed position after balancing. Figure 7-32 illustrates
meet industrial ventilation requirements vary with a method of locking the damper blade in place, fabri-
temperature, surface area, toxicity level and vapor par- cators’ alternate designs may also be considered.

7.19.2 Back–draft Dampers 7.22 VENTILATOR HEADS AND LOUVERS
Back-draft dampers shall be provided where indicated Ventilator heads and louvers shall be installed where
on the drawings. Figure 7-33 illustrates an acceptable indicated on the design drawings. Figures 7-27 and
method of constructing a back–draft damper from FRP 7-35 illustrate acceptable construction techniques for
materials. these items.
7.23 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

7.19.3 Fire Dampers
Flexible connections shall be provided to handle ex-
Fire dampers shall be installed only where shown on pansion and contraction in long runs of FRP duct, or
the project drawings. Life safety engineers strongly as anti–vibration barriers at locations indicated on the
recommend that all systems conveying hazardous project drawings.
fumes be routed directly to the outside without passing
through fire partitions, so as to avoid using fire damp- 7.24 FLEXIBLE MATERIALS
ers due to the possibility of inadvertent closing of the
fire damper. Where the fire protection methods speci-
Usually, an elastomeric sheet material, chosen to pro-
fied include the use of fire dampers; the location, type,
vide corrosion resistance and temperature compatibil-
and complete construction requirements of all fire
ity suitable for the environment, is used to form the
dampers shall be set forth in the project drawings or
flexible coupling joint.
specifications.
7.25 LINEAR COEFFICIENT OF THERMAL
When fire dampers are installed, a gasketed access panel EXPANSION
shall be provided in the duct adjacent to each damper.
Operating devices for the fire dampers should be suitably This coefficient is a function of the type of resin, the
protected from corrosive environments. fillers used and the percentage of chopped glass, wo-
ven roving or filament wound strands of reinforcement
7.20 ACCESS OPENINGS AND END CAPS used. Usually, for chopped or hand layed up construc-
tion, assuming 30% glass content, the coefficient of
Access openings shall be provided in the duct work at thermal expansion varies from a low of 10–5 in./in./_F
the locations specified by the project drawings. All ac- (1.8 x 10–2 mm/m/_C), to a high of 2.2 x 10–5 in./in./_F
cess openings shall be rigidly framed and fitted with (4.0 x 10–2 mm/m/_C). If a single value is required use
air–tight covers which can be simply and speedily re- 1.6 x 10–5 in./in./_F (2.9 x 10–2 mm/m/_C) (roughly
moved and installed. Cover plate and end cap thick- twice that of steel and half that of thermoplastic mate-
ness shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. (6 mm), and shall rials).
be reinforced across the shortest dimension as neces-
sary, to comply with the maximum spacing and rigid- Note: The need for expansion joints is dependent on
ity requirements with widths equal to the shortest cov- conditions and, in many cases, the configuration of the
er plate dimension. (See Figure 7-34.) Attaching ductwork will be such that its thermal movement can
hardware should be spaced not more than 5 in. (125 be accommodated without the use of such joints. When
mm) center to center. Figure 7-34 also illustrates ac- considering the thermal movement of ducts, the effect
ceptable access door and capped duct construction. on minor branches, thermocouple points, etc., should
be considered. These branches should be freely sup-
ported to assure that the movement of the main duct is
7.21 DRAINS not opposed. Where this is not possible, flexible con-
nections must be arranged between the branches and
Drains shall be installed at the locations indicated on the main duct. Design drawings should indicate the
the project drawings. The drains shall be full–sized, location for expansion joints when required. Expan-
FRP threaded half couplings, not less than 1 in. (25 sion joints may be in the form of modified sleeve joints
mm) IPS and suitable for receiving standard pipe con- or bellows. Where possible, bellows should be located
nections unless otherwise specified. The fittings shall only in vertical legs to allow free drainage. Location
be trimmed flush with the interior surface of the duct. of drainage points should be indicated on the dra-
Reinforcement bosses shall be provided in the FRP wings. Drainage should be provided at low points of
ductwork wherever necessary to insure rigid connec- the system and where accumulation of moisture is an-
tion of drains. ticipated.

7.26 TOLERANCES 7.26.5 Flange Tolerance
The definitions used in this manual are in accordance a. Warpage = ± 3_

with industry standards and as shown in ASTM
D–883. b. Offset = ± 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) 1/2_
7.26.1 Out of Roundness c. Perpendicularity = ± 1/2_
d. Cant = ± 1/2_
For ducts 6 in. (150 mm) or less in diameter, the toler-
ance is ± 1/16 in. (1.6 mm). For ducts larger than 6 in.
e. Flange flatness = ± 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) for
(150 mm) in diameter, the tolerance is ± 1/8 in. (3.2
ducts under 18 in. (460 mm) in diameter and
mm) or ± 1% of the diameter, whichever is greater. In ± 1/16 in. 1.6 mm) for ducts larger than 18 in.
no event shall the tolerance be more than 3/4 in. (19.1 (460 mm).
mm).
f. Back of Flange face: Back of Flange face
7.26.2 Overall Length shall be parallel with the flange face within ±
1_, otherwise spot face back of flange for ac-
ceptable washer seating.
The overall section length shall be the specified length
± 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
7.27 DRAINAGE
7.26.3 Squareness
FRP duct systems must be installed allowing for drain-
age of condensate. Sloping horizontal runs and the
The cut end of round duct shall be square within: provision for deep seal traps allow collection, and dis-
posal of the condensate. Special handling and disposal
± 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) for duct up to 24 in. (610 mm) of contaminated fluids may be required to meet EPA
in diameter, regulations.
7.28 SPRINKLERS
± 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) for duct 24 in. (610 mm) up
to 48 in. (1220 mm) in diameter, and
When sprinklers are required, the duct system shall be
installed with access doors, or other means to permit
± 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) for duct larger than 48 in. (1220 easy handling and installation of the sprinkler heads.
mm) in diameter. When sprinkler systems are installed, a drainage sys-
tem must be engineered to properly drain the duct sys-
Note: Using the longest side of a rectangular duct find tem.
the next larger standard round duct diameter and use
that diameter to determine the tolerance for the entire 7.29 BURIED DUCT
duct section.
All buried ducts destined to operate under direct con-
tact with back–fill materials require special structural
7.26.4 Flanged or Plain End Duct and Fit-
design to handle the unique loads typical of such
tings
installations.
Flanged or plain end duct and fittings must be within FRP ducts designed per the requirements of this manu-
the following angles from their design location: al DO NOT include consideration of the special struc-
tural requirements of buried duct.
For duct 24 in. (610 mm) and less in diameter, the
tolerance is ± 1_ 7.30 MANUFACTURER’S SHOP REVIEW
For duct larger than 24 in. (610 mm) and up to 48
in. (1220 mm) in diameter, the tolerance is ± 3/4_ It is recommended that the end user should visit and in-
For duct larger than 48 in. (1220 mm) in diameter, spect a fabricator’s facilities and review his require-
the tolerance is ± 1/2_ ments before issuing a contract to build and install FRP

duct. Evidence of past performance can relieve prob- 7.32 HANDLING, SHIPPING, AND INSTAL-
lems and enhance the relationship between parties. LATION
7.32.1 Handling
7.31 INSPECTION
FRP duct laminates require special attention in han-
The FRP duct fabricator shall cooperate with the Own- dling. While the material provides excellent self sup-
ers inspector in the following manner: porting strength when properly installed, it is suscepti-
ble to cracking and crazing if impacted by sharp
objects. (Review ASTM D3982 for additional details
a. Make available to the inspector such records on shipping, handling, and installation.)
pertaining to the fabrication of FRP ducting
as required to permit the inspector to perform 7.32.2 Shipping
his duties. These shall include drawings, de-
sign calculations, material test results, physi- Because of the light weight of fiberglass duct and
cal test data, materials supplier’s product cer- hoods, the primary determinants of the overall dimen-
tifications, and any other reports or records sions of the subassemblies will be the dimensional
pertaining to the job in process. shipping limitations. The dimensions of the subassem-
blies shall be determined by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
b. The fabricator shall make his quality control
personnel available to the inspector.
The following list includes typical precautions that
can prevent or reduce the incidence of damage during
c. The fabricator shall make available any nec- loading, transit, and unloading:
essary tools and test equipment for the in-
spector to conduct his inspections as required a. Protect all ductwork for shipment, and espe-
to meet this standard. cially appurtenances, that could be easily
damaged.
d. The fabricator shall make available to the in- b. Protect all flange surfaces with wooden
spector any cut–out specimens of laminates blinds or other approved material.
left over from the job.
c. Support large subassemblies during shipment
and unloading to prevent excessive deflec-
e. The finished FRP duct laminate shall not be tion and over stressing.
tacky to touch when conducting an acetone
test for resin cure. (Apply a small drop of ace- d. Unload the equipment with care and store it
tone to the laminate surface, rub clean with a in a location where it will be free of damage.
dry cheese cloth, check for evidence of resin Impact of a tool or other heavy object may re-
residue on the cloth.) sult in a fracture of the inner lining and may
affect the service life of the system.
f. Barcol hardness shall be in accordance with
ASTM D2583 and the quality control section 7.32.3 Installation
of Chapter 8. (See Chapter 8 – Quality Con-
trol and Safety, for details on surface hard- The following list describes minimum requirements
ness requirements, testing and other quality for the proper installation of FRP duct systems:
control topics.)
a. Use properly designed hangers with a mini-
mum of 150_ circumferential contact (for
g. Visual appearance – The finished laminate round duct) and 2 in. (51 mm) minimum lon-
shall generally conform to the visual accep- gitudinal contact. All ducts included in this
tance criteria of Table 5, ASTM C582. Crite- manual are designed for a maximum support
ria include no cracks, pits, crazing, blisters, spacing of 10 ft (3050 mm).
wrinkles, dry spots (unwetted glass fiber),
chips and gouges, entrapped air, or foreign b. All other equipment or service loads shall be
matter in the laminate substrate. supported independently.

c. Use flexible connections to isolate ductwork h. The vendor shall specify the quantity of
from vibration caused by air–moving equip- field–joining kits subject to the concurrence
ment. of the customer. The vendor shall supply ma-
terial safety data sheets and field–joining in-
d. Use full–face gaskets to eliminate any canti- structions along with the joining materials.
lever effect caused from bolting.
i. Clean bonding surfaces to remove grease, oil,
e. Tighten bolting on flanged connections fol- dirt, moisture, or any other contaminants. In
lowing torque values given in section 7.14.3. addition, sand or grind surface to remove the
surface gloss. Do not use solvents on any fresh-
f. Tighten bolts following the sequence shown ly sanded or ground surfaces.
in Figure 7-7.
j. Anchor all joints to eliminate any movement
g. Use washers under bolt heads and nuts. during the joining and curing process.
Minimum Cylinder Wall Thickness Minimum Total Bond Width

in. (mm) in. (mm)
0.139 (3.53) 4 (100)
0.180 (4.57) 5 (125)
0.200 (5.58) 6 (150)
0.300 (7.62) 6 (150)
0.340 (8.64) 6 (150)
0.380 (9.65) 6 (150)
0.420 (10.67) 8 (200)
0.480 (12.19) 8 (200)
Table 7--5 Minimum Bond Widths
Notes:
a. The terms bond, weld, and joint are used interchangeably in practice.
b. For joining Types I and II laminates, bond construction must equal or exceed that of the wall construction.
See Table 5-1 or 5-2.
c. For joining Filament Wound (Type X) laminates, a special bond construction is required. See Table 5-8.
d. Copyright ASTM. Reprinted with permission.

FLANGE CANT
MAIN RUN CENTERLINE

BRANCH CENTERLINE
Copyright ASTM.
Reprinted with permission
FIGURE 7-- 2 FLANGE CANT
WASHER SEALING
PARALLEL WITH
FLANGE FACE
FLANGE
WARPAGE
PLANE OF
THE ID
PLANE PERPENDICULAR TO FLANGE

DUCT’S CENTERLINE PERPENDICULAR
FLANGE
FLATNESS
Copyright ASTM.
FIGURE 7-- 3 FLANGE TOLERANCE DESCRIPTION

BRANCH CENTERLINE MAIN RUN CENTERLINE
FLANGE OFFSET
Copyright ASTM.
FIGURE 7-- 4 FLANGE OFFSET
CORROSION CORROSION
BARRIER BARRIER
3/8” (9.5 mm) 3/8” (9.5 mm)

RADIUS RADIUS
MINIMUM MINIMUM
CORROSION CORROSION
BARRIER BARRIER
(A) “FLANGE ON DUCT” TYPE (B) “INTEGRAL” TYPE
Copyright ASTM.
FIGURE 7-- 5 FLANGE ATTACHMENT

MINIMUM BOND (WELD) WIDTH
(SEE TABLE 5--8 OR 7--5)
NOTE:
BOND, WELD, AND JOINT ARE USED INTERCHANGEABLY IN PRACTICE
Copyright ASTM.
FIGURE 7-- 6 WELD WIDTH AND THICKNESS
FOR FLANGES HAVING A DIFFERENT SPECIFIED NUMBER OF BOLTS

(SEE TABLES 5--5 AND 6--7), FOLLOW THE SAME GENERAL PRINCIPLE
INDICATED BY THIS TWELVE BOLT EXAMPLE.
1 12
5 8
9 4
3 10
7 6
11 2 Copyright ASTM.
FIGURE 7--7 BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

WIDTH OUT
x
DEPTH OUT
STRAIGHT IN
STRAIGHT OUT
FIGURE 7--8 SQUARE THROAT ELBOWS
CENTER
RADIUS
FIGURE 7--9 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR STANDARD ELBOW

WIDTH (W)
x
DEPTH (DR)
RECTANGULAR CENTER RADIUS

R = 1.5W (min.)
CENTER ROUND CENTER RADIUS
RADIUS R = 1.5D (min.)
ROUND D
FIGURE 7-- 10 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR ANGLES
LT. RT.
WIDTH OUT WIDTH OUT
LT.
STRAIGHT IN
LT.
STRAIGHT
OUT RT.
STRAIGHT
OUT
FIGURE 7--11 RECTANGULAR TEES

LEFT SET RIGHT SET
STRAIGHT OUT
LENGTH
STRAIGHT IN
FIGURE 7-- 12 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR OFFSETS
WIDTH OUT
x
DEPTH OUT
CENTER
RADIUS
ANGLE
FIGURE 7--13 TRANSITION ELBOWS

STRAIGHT OUT
CENTER RADIUS
R = 1.5D
STRAIGHT IN
FIGURE 7-- 14 FIVE SEGMENT ELBOW
LEFT SET RIGHT SET
STRAIGHT OUT
LENGTH
STRAIGHT IN
FIGURE 7--15 ROUND / SQUARE REDUCERS

OFFSET
STRAIGHT STRAIGHT
LENGTH
IN OUT
FIGURE 7--16 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR ECCENTRIC REDUCERS
TAP ANGLE
TAP LENGTH
(90° OR LESS)
INSET
BODY LENGTH
FIGURE 7-- 17 ROUND TEES

TAP COLLAR
TAP LENGTH
BASE COLLAR
INSET BASE DIAMETER
BODY LENGTH
FIGURE 7-- 18 CONICAL TEES
TAP COLLAR
TAP LENGTH
BASE COLLAR
INSET BASE DIAMETER
REDUCER
BODY LENGTH LENGTH REDUCER
COLLAR
FIGURE 7-- 19 CONICAL REDUCING TEES / LATERAL

TAP ANGLE
TAP LENGTH
INSET
REDUCER
BODY LENGTH LENGTH REDUCER
COLLAR
FIGURE 7-- 20 REDUCING TEES / LATERAL
TAP COLLAR
TAP LENGTH
BASE COLLAR
TAP ANGLE
(90° OR LESS)
BASE
DIAMETER
INSET
BODY LENGTH
FIGURE 7-- 21 CONICAL LATERALS

LT. TAP
LENGTH
LT. TAP ANGLE
(90° OR LESS)
LT. INSET
RT. INSET
RT. TAP ANGLE

RT. TAP
(90° OR LESS)
LENGTH
BODY LENGTH
FIGURE 7-- 22 TEE / LATERAL CROSSES
RIGHT LEFT
LENGTH LENGTH
LEFT ANGLE RIGHT ANGLE

(90° OR LESS) (90° OR LESS)
INLET COLLAR
FIGURE 7--23 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR WYES

RT. COLLAR
RT. TAP
LENGTH
RT. RT. BASE
LT. BASE LENGTH DIAMETER
DIAMETER
LT. COLLAR
LT. TAP LENGTH
INLET COLLAR
LT. LENGTH
FIGURE 7--24 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR REDUCING WYES
STRAIGHT
IN
RISE
STRAIGHT
LENGTH OUT
FIGURE 7-- 25 ROUND OR RECTANGULAR OFFSETS

BODY LENGTH
LT. BASE WIDTH LEFT

COLLAR
LEFT INSET
LT. CONE
LENGTH
RIGHT RIGHT CONE

INSET LENGTH
RIGHT COLLAR
RT. BASE WIDTH
FIGURE 7-- 26 CONICAL TEE CROSSES
NOTE: CHANNEL FRAME

THIS FIGURE ILLUSTRATES TYPICAL
CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUE ONLY.
ACTUAL LOUVER CONFIGURATION
AND DETAILS WILL DEPEND UPON
PARTICULAR APPLICATION, DEGREE
OF WEATHERPROOFNESS, ETC. RE-
QUIREMENTS SHOULD BE SPECI-
FIED IN PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS.
REFER TO SMACNA’S ARCHITEC-
TURAL SHEET METAL MANUAL AND
HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STAN-
DARDS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMA-
TION ON LOUVER CONFIGURATIONS
SUPPORT STRAP ON
2 ft (610 mm) CENTERS
MITER CORNERS
FIGURE 7-- 27 TYPICAL LOUVER CONSTRUCTION

HANGER RODS
USE SINGLE HANGER FOR

DUCTS 12” (300 mm) AND BELOW
THREADED
ROD
FLAT BAR
FLAT BAR
SPLIT RING
ANGLE IRON NUTS

TOP & BOTTOM
NOTES:
1. SEE TABLES 7--1 THROUGH 7--4 FOR HANGER REQUIREMENTS
2. SUPPORTS SHOWN DO NOT INCLUDE SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS
3. APPLICATIONS WHICH INVOLVE REPETITIVE AXIAL MOVEMENTS OF THE DUCT
AS A RESULT OF EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, OR VIBRATION MAY REQUIRE THE
ADDITION OF WEAR PLATES BETWEEN THE DUCT AND ITS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FIGURE 7--28 DUCT HANGERS – HORIZONTAL

RECTANGULAR
DUCT
FRP STRAP
SUPPORT SECURED TO
DUCT WITH
RESIN
EXPANSION ANGLES
JOINT WHERE BOLTED
CONDITIONS TO STEEL
NECESSITATE (AS BRACKET
MAX. DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS
SPECIFIED IN THE
DESIGN
DOCUMENTATION
ONLY)
= 16 ft (4.9 m)
GUIDE (SAME AS
SUPPORT WITHOUT STEEL
GIRTH STRAP) BRACKET
BOTH
SIDES
ROUND
DUCT
FRP GIRTH
STRAP SECURED
TO DUCT WITH
STEEL CLIP RESIN
WELDED TO
BRACKET
STEEL SPLIT RING,

CLOSE FIT (NOT
SUPPORT COMPRESSED)
STEEL BRACKET
BOTH SIDES
SUPPORT
NOTE:
SUPPORTS SHOWN DO NOT INCLUDE SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS
FIGURE 7--29 SUPPORT FOR VERTICAL DUCT

FRP BLADE
0.149” (3.78 mm)
MINIMUM
(V, 3M, V)
AIR 3/4”
FLOW (20 mm)
AIR 90°
4–1/2” (115 mm)
FLOW WIDTH
RADIUS
OPTIONAL RECOMMENDED RADIUS

FRP PLATE(S) WIDTH AND THICKNESS
4–1/2” (115 mm) MAXIMUM OF TURNING VANES
RECOMMENDED VANE SPACING

TOP AND BOTTOM
PLATE (OPTIONAL)
0.149” (3.78 mm)

MINIMUM
(V, 3M, V)
SINGLE VANE
48” (1200 mm)
MAX. SPAN
PLATE REINFORCED VANE MODULE
NOTES:
1. WHERE DUCT HEIGHT EXCEEDS 48” (1200 mm), INSTALL VANES IN MODULES WHOSE INDIVIDUAL
HEIGHT IS LESS THAN 48” (1200 mm) AND ARE PLATE REINFORCED TOP AND BOTTOM
2. SECURE VANES, OR OPTIONAL TOP AND BOTTOM FRP PLATES, TO FRP DUCT SHEET WITH
RESIN. WHERE DUCT HEIGHT REQUIRES MULTIPLE VANE MODULES, ALSO SECURE ENDS OF
INTERMEDIATE STIFFENER PLATE(S) TO ELBOW THROAT AND HEEL.
FIGURE 7-- 30 TURNING VANE CONSTRUCTION

BLADE = DUCT WALL + 1/16” (1.59 mm)
BLADE STOP
1.5D + 6” (150 mm)
12”
(300 mm)
6”
D D/2 (150 mm)
FIGURE 7-- 31 TYPICAL BLAST GATE

0.192” (4.88 mm)
TYP THK (V, 4M, V)
BLADE
1/8” STOP
(3.18 mm) TYP
FRP HANDLE
PIN OPEN
45°
90°
PIN CLOSE
1/8” STENCIL “OPEN”

(3.18 mm)
AND “CLOSE”
STRAPPING
0.192” (4.88 mm)

THK (V, 4M, V)
BLADE
APPROX.
1/2” (12.7 mm)
(2) 1/4” (6.4 mm) DIA. WIDE BLADE
PINS STAGGER 90° STOPS
APART AND TAB
OVER
FIGURE 7--32 TYPICAL BUTTERFLY DAMPER WITH LOCKING DEVICE

45° 45°
BOLT HOLES
STRADDLE
1/2” (12.7 mm) DIA.

6 HOLES
1–1/2” (38.1 mm)

0.125” (3.18 mm)
MIN. FRP BLADES
ROD W/ TUBE
1/2” (12.7 mm) DIA.

2 HOLES 180° APART
FIGURE 7--33 GRAVITY BACK–DRAFT DAMPER FOR VERTICAL DUCT

NOTE: 1/4”
REINFORCE ACCESS COVERS AND DUCT (6.4 mm)
END CAPS ACROSS SHORTEST MIN.
DIMENSION AS REQUIRED
DRILL AND TAP
1–1/8”
(28.58 mm)
FRP
STRAPPING
ACCESS
OPENING COVER
PLATE
CORROSION
RESISTANT
HARDWARE
EXTERIOR 5” (125 mm)
REINFORCEMENT COVER O.C. MAX.
IF REQUIRED
ACCESS OPENING
OPTIONALLY,
BOLT HEADS MAY GASKET
BE EMBEDDED IN
FRP FRAME 1/2”
(12.7 mm)
GASKET
MIN.
CORROSION
RESISTANT
HARDWARE
5” (125 mm)
O.C. MAX.
COVER
FRP DUCT
END CAP
FIGURE 7-- 34 DUCT OPENINGS

D + 1”
(D + 25.4 mm)
D
4’ (1200 mm)
MINIMUM
LENGTH
4D
1–1/2D AT TOP
LENGTH
1–1/2D + 1” (25.4 mm)
6” (150 mm)
MIN.
1–3/4D
FRP FLAT BAR
SPACERS INTEGRAL
WITH STACK
TOP
1” (25.4 mm) GAP

AT BOTTOM
FIGURE 7-- 35 TYPICAL STACKHEADS


CHAPTER 8
QUALITY CONTROL AND

SAFETY
CHAPTER 8 QUALITY CONTROL AND SAFETY
8.1 QUALITY CONTROL d. Rectification of any nonconformities or im-

perfections to the FRP duct prior to final in-
8.1.1 General spection and approval for shipment. Such re-
pairs shall be recorded and include the date of
The fabricator shall have a quality control program, to correction and specific location of the repair
ensure that all the requirements of the Thermoset FRP on the duct laminate.
Duct Construction Manual are met, as agreed to be-
tween the fabricator and the user. e. Scheduling and notification to the user’s in-
spector for a final inspection and acceptance
The fabricator shall maintain a quality control proof the FRP duct components.
gram suitable for the scope of the work to be per-
formed. 8.1.4 Barcol Hardness
A copy of the fabricator’s quality control manual shall Take a single Barcol reading near the 1/3 and 2/3
be made available to the user’s inspector on request, lengths (longitudinal direction) of the duct and near
along with any quality control forms used during the middle (transverse direction) of each of the sides,
construction of the FRP duct. top, and bottom of rectangular duct (or approximately
at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree for round duct), resulting
8.1.2 Organization in a total of 8 readings. Remove the highest and lowest
value and the average of the remaining values should
The quality control program shall include the fabrica- be equal to or greater than 90% of the Barcol hardness
tor’s organizational chart, which indicates reporting value established by the resin manufacturer for the
responsibility and authority. This chart should illus- cured resin.
trate that the quality control function is independent of
the production group. Exception: Laminate surfaces finished with synthetic
veil and resin are considered adequately cured when
8.1.3 Documentation the average hardness, established as described above,
equals or exceeds 80% of the Barcol hardness value es-
The quality control program shall include the docu- tablished by the resin manufacturer for the cured resin.
mentation required by this manual, organized in one
place and made readily available to the user’s inspec- Low Barcol values due to pits or other defects should
tor during fabrication. be eliminated and not included in the 8 readings. The
tests shall be performed on at least 10% of all the duct
The quality control program shall ensure that the latest sections being manufactured. To check Barcol hard-
applicable drawings, design calculations, specifica- ness of FRP components, refer to ASTM D2583.
tions, and any addenda to this manual are used in the
fabrication, inspection, and testing of the duct compo- Under–cured laminates exhibiting low Barcol read-
nents. ings should be post–cured at a minimum of 180_F
(82_C) for sufficient time to increase Barcol hardness
The quality control program must include specific pro- in excess of the minimum Barcol hardness require-
cedures for the following: ments.
a. Inspection of received goods, including raw 8.1.5 Tolerance for Average Thickness
materials and purchased items, i.e., any ma-
terials that will become part of the finished The acceptability of a duct’s wall thickness shall be
FRP duct. evaluated on the basis of its average thickness, defined
as the arithmetic average of six spot thickness values
b. In–process inspection of resin mixing, raw taken at random. The duct’s average thickness shall
material dispersement, component fabrica- not be less than 85%, nor greater than 120%, of the de-
tion, and assembly procedures including ver- sign wall thickness (also referred to as required wall
ification of reinforcement sequence. thickness). In determining the average thickness, the
lowest of all readings taken shall not be less than
c. Record all Barcol hardness and laminate (minimum thickness) 70%, nor greater than (maxi-
thickness tests. The records shall be main- mum thickness) 130%, of the design wall thickness.
tained together with other quality control Isolated low spots may be repaired, at the option of the
data. fabricator, so that upon re–testing of the repaired area,

the minimum spot thickness, as well as the average are produced. Caution should be used to avoid inhala-
spot thickness for the duct section meet the criteria tion of these toxic fumes. A self–contained breathing
stated above. If isolated spots or the duct’s average apparatus should be worn when extinguishing such
thickness exceed the tolerance criteria on the plus side, fires.
acceptance of round duct is at the discretion of the par-
ties involved, while acceptance of rectangular duct 8.3 HEALTH CONCERNS
may require engineering analysis, since excess thick-
ness (beyond the tolerance limit) in one area may re- 8.3.1 Skin Contact
sult in overstressing other parts of the duct wall.
Protective gloves and clothing should be worn to avoid
8.2 SAFETY skin contact while handling styrenated resins. Pro-
longed or repeated skin contact may cause skin irrita-
8.2.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) tion. Any contact with the skin should be washed thor-
oughly with soap and water. If irritation persists, seek
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available medical attention or use a recommended skin cream to
from all thermoset resin manufacturers. The MSDS soothe and seal the pores of the skin.
contains health and safety information to assist han-
dlers in developing appropriate product handling pro- 8.3.2 Eye Contact
cedures to protect the employees. The MSDS should
be read and understood by all personnel before han- Chemical goggles shall be worn at all times when
dling the resins and other raw materials used for fabri- working with liquid resins, or grinding and sanding
cating and installing FRP duct systems. cured laminates. If exposure to these products causes
eye irritation, stinging, redness, or swelling, flush the
eyes with plenty of water. DO NOT RUB DRY. If the
8.2.2 Styrene
symptoms persist, seek medical attention.
All thermoset resins are polymers diluted with styrene
8.3.3 Inhalation
monomer in order to obtain a workable viscosity. The
hazardous ingredient in the resins is styrene. The poly-
Do not inhale styrenated resin vapors or dust from
mer itself is non–hazardous. Styrene has a pungent
grinding. Provide adequate ventilation to minimize in-
odor that is easily detected due to the low sensitivity
halation. The personal exposure limit to styrene is 50
of odor detection of 1 ppm. Finished FRP constructed
PPM as an 8 hour time weighted average. Repeated ex-
laminates will retain a residual styrene odor after cur-
cessive exposures to high amounts may cause central
ing for several days or even weeks. Styrene is subject
nervous system, liver, kidney effects and respiratory or
to a number of federal regulations. Current styrene
eye irritation. Repeated exposures to smaller amounts
regulations should be reviewed prior to handling styre-
may cause central nervous system effects and respira-
nated products.
tory or eye irritation. If inhalation symptoms develop,
move the person to fresh air immediately. If the person
8.2.3 Flammability has difficulty in breathing, administer oxygen or pro-
vide artificial respiration, keep the person warm, and
Thermoset polyester and vinyl ester liquid resins are seek medical assistance.
flammable due to the presence of styrene monomer.
These resins should be stored away from heat sources 8.3.4 Ingestion
such as: space heaters, open flames, and spark produc-
ing equipment. SMOKING IS STRICTLY PRO- If accidentally swallowed, do not induce vomiting as
HIBITED. the resin material is an aspiration hazard. Seek medical
attention immediately. Do not leave the person unat-
In the event of a fire involving styrenated resins, it is tended while help arrives.
recommended that the flames be extinguished by us-
ing foam, dry powder or carbon dioxide. The use of 8.3.5 Chronic Health Effects
water is not recommended because the resins are insol-
uble in water, and may spread the fire as they are car- Styrene has been classified by the International
ried along by the water current. Agency for Research for Cancer (IARC) as a possible
carcinogen to humans. However, a number of lifetime
When these resins burn, toxic gases such as carbon animal studies with styrene have not shown styrene to
monoxide, and halogenated–products of combustion be carcinogenic.

8.3.6 Resin Spills cause storage life decreases with increasing tempera-
tures.
Small resin spills of less than 3.5 oz (100 grams) can
be wiped up with paper towels and safety solvent. Resin containers should be sealed tight to prevent
Spills greater than 3.5 oz (100 grams) and less than 10 moisture pick–up and styrene monomer evaporation.
gallons (38 liters) should be cleaned up with sand or
other absorbent material, then shoveled into a contain- 8.3.8 Disposal
er for proper disposal. The sticky residue should be re-
moved with rags, then washed with a safety solvent Local and state guidelines should be carefully fol-
and hot soapy water. The area shall be continuously lowed when disposing of liquid resins. Generally, liq-
ventilated with fans or other exhaust devices. uid resins are not acceptable in landfills. Such liquid
resin waste should be converted to solid waste by
Larger resin spills should be contained promptly with- means of catalization of the liquid materials prior to
in a periphery sand dike. Next, the liquid resin should disposal.
be scooped up, if possible, and placed in open head
steel drums. Residue should be absorbed with sand and Some states allow the dumping of solid resin or cured
then shoveled into containers for proper disposal. Fi- laminate waste in landfill areas.
nal cleanup of the spilled area should follow the same
procedure as described above for small spills. Prior to dumping waste materials, it is recommended
that the proper state or local agency be contacted to
8.3.7 Storage confirm the approved method of disposal for cured res-
in parts and residue.
Resin received in drums should be stored below 80_F
(27_C) in a covered storage area outside of the main CAUTION: Always wear the proper protective cloth-
workplace. The resin drums should be kept away from ing, safety glasses, safety shoes, and gloves when han-
direct sunlight or other heat sources. Styrenated resins dling liquid resins, solvents, catalysts, promoters, or
have a limited storage life which is determined by the when cutting, grinding, or sanding cured FRP lami-
resin manufacturer, e.g., vinyl ester resins have less of nate components. Pay particular attention to the ven-
a storage life as compared to most polyester resins. tilation requirements during fabrication, installation,
Resins should not be stored above 80_F (27_C) be- and curing of FRP duct systems.


CHAPTER 9
FRP GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 9 FRP GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
9.1 GENERAL layout plus the supplementary information required by

this guide specification. The drawings should include
This section provides a guide for specifying fiberglass elevations of duct, slope, service equipment, and loca-
reinforced plastic (FRP) duct and duct fittings for air– tion of terminations or connections to other equipment
handling and fume–control systems. This guide speci- where applicable. Drawings should indicate where
fication is not intended as a reference document, but ducts are to be concealed or exposed and any other de-
rather is a guide for the development of specifications tails pertinent to the contractor and not included in the
for a particular project. This guide specification must job specifications.
be edited to fit the conditions of use and work assign-
ments. Particular attention should be given to the dele- 9.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT PROVISIONS
tion of inapplicable provisions and addition of neces-
sary provisions related to a specific project. This manual does not include the special support pro-
Appropriate requirements should be included where visions that may be required for seismic restraint. The
blank spaces have been provided. system designer should prescribe them as necessary.
9.2 DRAWINGS 9.4 GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
The duct system should be described by drawings de- Starting on page 9.2, a guide specification is presented
veloped in association with the system specification. for use in developing specifications for a particular
The drawings should present, as a minimum, a system project.

GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC
AIR–HANDLING SYSTEMS
1.00 GENERAL PROVISIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS

The General and Supplementary Conditions of the This section corresponds with CSI Division 15,
Specification are hereby made a part of this branch of Section 15010 and it relates to CSI Division 1, Gen-
work. The Air Handling Contractor shall be governed eral Requirements.
by all of the requirements thereof, insofar as they apply
to the Contractor’s work.
1.01 Work Included
This division includes all labor, materials, equipment, Specifier should select only those items actually re-
and accessories necessary to complete the air–han- quired on the particular project. This list may be
dling system(s) specified herein. used as a checklist to ascertain that all component
parts of the system are actually covered.
Access doors (ductwork and housings)
Air Handling Units
Air Washers or Scrubbers
Balancing and Adjusting
Belt Guards
Casing, Housings, and Plenums
Dampers, Volume (manual and motorized)
Duct Drainage Fittings
Ductwork
Eliminators
Equipment Foundation Drawings
Fans
Flexible Connections & Expansion Joints
Flexible Ducts
Hoods* * Should be coordinated with CSI Division 11, Labo-
Louvers and Screens (intake and exhaust) ratory Equipment and Industrial Equipment.
Pans (condensate, etc.)
Spray Booths
System Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB)
1.02 Work Excluded
Concrete Foundations Specifier should verify that allied construction work
Cutting and Patching is covered under appropriate divisions and/or sec-
Electrical Work tions of the specification.
Metal Access Panels in Building –
Construction If the contract for a FRP duct system is in the nature
Openings in Floors, Walls, and Roofs of a prime contract, these items may be incorporated
Painting (except as specified) as applicable.
Pipe Insulation
Plumbing and Pipe Work
Temporary Heat
Transfer Grilles in Doors
Waterproofing of Floor Under Equipment
Utilities
Drain Piping from Duct Drainage Fittings

1.03 Coordination of Work
a. Coordination with Other Contractors: The Air flow characteristics are normally more critical
Air Handling Contractor shall work with oth- than hydraulic flow characteristics and additional
er trades to avoid interferences in the installa- changes in direction can seriously affect proper bal-
tion of work covered by the contract. The ancing of a system.
routing of ductwork shall have precedence
over electrical, plumbing, piping and sprin-
kler work. Should differences of opinion de-
velop, the Architect’s or Engineer’s decision
shall be final. Work shall be installed so as
not to delay progress of construction and shall
be coordinated with other trades.
b. Electrical Work: All control wiring (unless Starters and disconnects would normally be in-
otherwise specified) power wiring, and set- cluded in the electrical portion of the work. Fan and
ting of loose motors shall be by others. Start- equipment schedules should be cross–referenced in
ers and disconnects shall be furnished and the electrical section for proper take–off.
installed by others.
c. Equipment Foundations: Concrete founda- If equipment foundations consist of a concrete iner-
tions for all equipment shall be furnished by tia base with vibration isolators , these should be
others under the supervision of the Air–Han- specified together with the equipment to be mounted
dling Contractor. Drawings, anchor bolts, thereon so that they are matched properly.
and templates shall be provided by the Air–
Handling Contractor.
d. Piping: Steam, hot and cold water, sprinkler, and drain lines
should be specified in the appropriate section(s) of
1. Plumbing
the specifications, to be routed and connected to the
2. Sprinkler Work air–handling units where shown on the drawings.
3. Steam fitting.
e. Cutting and Patching: The General Contrac- Specifier shall verify that this section is referenced
tor shall do all cutting and patching in floors, in the proper division of the specification to cover
walls, and roofs for the installation of equip- the cutting and patching required.
ment and air ducts. The Air–Handling Con-
tractor shall cooperate in the location of
openings in new construction. The Air–Han-
dling Contractor shall be responsible for the
cutting of all duct openings through non
load–bearing walls in existing structures.
f. Openings in Floors, Walls and Roofs: The
General Contractor shall be responsible for
providing openings of specified dimensions
in floors, walls and roofs complete with curbs
and bucks as required for all equipment and
air ducts.
g. Scaffolding: The Air–Handling Contractor The economy of multiple usage of scaffolding may
shall provide all scaffolding for the installa- not always be possible. When using this specifica-
tion of this branch of the work in areas where tion, verify that it is also covered under the General
the General Contractor has no requirements Contractor’s portion of the work.

for this equipment. Where scaffolding is pro-
vided by the General Contractor for the erec-
tion of his work, this equipment shall be left
in place for the use of the Air–Handling Con-
tractor at no charge. The Air–Handling Con-
tractor shall have free use of hoist and eleva-
tors for the transportation of his workers,
materials and equipment. All scaffolding
shall meet the requirements of local and state
codes.
h. Permits and Licenses: The Air–Handling This paragraph should be in agreement with the
Contractor shall secure all permits and li- General Conditions for the entire project and could
censes required for the installation of this make reference to them as well as indicate any devi-
branch of the work and shall pay all fees inci- ations or additions.
dent thereto.
i. Taxes: The Air–Handling Contractor shall
pay all federal, state, and local taxes applica-
ble to this branch of the work.
j. Utilities: All temporary sanitary and storm Verify coverage of these facilities’ services and their
drainage facilities and all utilities including usage under other portions of the specification.
water and electrical services shall be pro-
vided by others. Electrical services by others
shall include adequate temporary lighting.
k. Access: The General Contractor shall pro-
vide and maintain vehicular and pedestrian
access routes to all work areas for the pur-
poses of material delivery and workmen en-
trance and exit.
1.04 Submittals
a. Shop Drawings: The Air–Handling Contrac- Sufficient copies should be included to enable draw-
tor shall submit for approval __________ ings to be supplied to other contractors that are pro-
copies of outline drawings and pertinent de- viding openings or curbs for ducts and equipment to
tails for major equipment and ductwork as be supplied under this section of the specification.
specified for this branch of the work. Includ-
ing ____________ resin information.
b. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:
The Air Handling Contractor shall furnish
_______ copies of written operating and
maintenance instructions for all equipment
furnished by him under this section.
1.05 Equipment Identification
The Air Handling Contractor shall place appropriate The contractor providing starters and control sta-
permanent identification labels or stencils on all fans tions which are not integrated with the controlled
and air–handling units. equipment should also provide appropriate perma-
nent identification of these items.

1.06 Referenced Documents
The following documents of the particular edition Refer to CSI Manual of Practice MP–3C “The Use
listed form part of this specification to the extent spe- of Reference Standards.” While changes in the stan-
cified herein. dards listed herein are normally only of a minor na-
ture, care should be exercised to indicate the exact
edition of the reference manual used in the design of
the particular systems being specified. The editions
listed in this column are the current editions at the
time of preparation for this document.
a. THERMOSET FRP DUCT CONSTRUC- This guide specification is based on the use of, and
TION MANUAL. (Mandatory provisions in reference to, the mandatory provisions of this manu-
Chapters Three through Eight) as published al, which are contained in Chapters Three through
by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Eight. The Manual includes reference to pertinent
Contractors’ National Association, 4201 La- standards as listed in Appendix E, Referenced Docu-
fayette Drive, Chantilly, VA 20153. ments. Reference to these documents need not be
duplicated in the project specification. Where spe-
b. HVAC SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING & cial requirements demand reference to other docu-
BALANCING. ibid. ments they should be added to this paragraph.
c. AMCA Publication 99 in this specification

shall mean the Standards for Air Moving De-
vices as published by the Air Movement and
Control Association, 30 W. University Drive,
Arlington Heights, IL 60004–1893.
d. AMCA Standard 210 in this specification

shall mean the Laboratory Methods of Test-
ing Fans for Rating. ibid.
e. INDUSTRIAL VENTILATION MANUAL in

this specification shall mean the ___ edition
of Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Rec-
ommended Practice as published by the
American Conference of Governmental In-
dustrial Hygienists, Kemper Woods Center,
1330 Kemper Meadows Dr., Cincinnati, OH
45240–1634.
2.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION FRP DUCTWORK Reference CSI Broadscope heading 15800.
All ductwork, fittings, and accessories shall be Depending on the particular project, the specifier
constructed and installed in accordance with SMAC- may find that the use of an alternate Broadscope
NA’s Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual. heading such as “Fume Exhaust System” is more
Hereinafter referred to as SMACNA’s FRP Manual. suitable.

Material thickness and reinforcements shall be as spe- SMACNA’s FRP Manual specifies construction re-
cified in SMACNA’s FRP Manual for the static pres- quirements for maximum operating static pressures.
sure classification (s) indicated on the project draw- When referencing the construction requirements of
ings. this standard, the static pressure classification(s)
must be specified.
To provide for more economical construction, the

system may be separated into portions having differ-
ent ratings. Where only a single rating is used, it
should be the maximum conditions anticipated in
the duct.
2.01 Materials
All materials shall be as specified in SMACNA’s FRP

Manual except as otherwise stated in this specifica-
tion.
2.02 Size
Duct sizes shall be in accordance with the project When nonstandard offsets or fittings are desired,
drawings which form a part of this specification. Un- they should be so specified on the drawings.
less otherwise specified on the project drawings, the
configuration of offsets, transitions, turns, etc., shall Refer to SMACNA’s FRP Manual for standard duct
be as specified in SMACNA’s FRP Manual. and fitting configurations, and specify sizes in ap-
propriate locations on the drawings.
2.03 Location of Access Doors
Access doors shall be located where indicated in the The location and size of all access openings should
project drawings. Access doors shall be constructed in be indicated on the project drawings. Access open-
accordance with SMACNA’s FRP Manual. ings are usually provided at all locations requiring
routine maintenance and replacement of parts or in-
spection of items concealed in the ductwork (damp-
ers, drains, etc.). Openings should also be provided
as necessary for performance of periodic cleaning.
2.04 Location of Regulating Dampers
Volume dampers shall be furnished and installed The location of all regulating dampers should be indi-
where indicated on the projects drawings. The damp- cated on the project drawings. Regulating dampers
ers shall be constructed in accordance with SMAC- should normally be provided at all fume hoods,
NA’s FRP Manual or equivalent. T–connections and any other location as necessary for
balancing and adjustment of the system.

2.05 Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be furnished and installed where in- Where fire dampers are required, their location and
dicated on the project drawings. type must be indicated on the project drawings. The
design party must assume the responsibility of con-
formance to local codes and requirements.
2.06 Location of Flexible Connections

Flexible connections shall be located where indicated The location of all flexible connections should be in-
on the project drawings. dicated on the project drawings. As a minimum,
they should be indicated between ductwork and the
inlet and outlet of fans and other moving equipment,
for the purpose of vibration isolation.
2.07 Location of Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be located where shown on the Since the expansion rate of FRP duct is several
project drawings. times that of steel, proper consideration must be giv-
en to any installation to accommodate the overall
Duct sizes shall be in accordance with the project
linear expansion.
drawings which form a part of this specification.
For both Flexible Connections and Expansion
Joints, the specifier shall designate suitable materi-
als and construction details.
2.08 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Duct and fittings shall be protected from damage dur-
ing shipment and handling. Properly support during
shipping and storage to avoid flex strains.
2.09 Hangers
Hangers shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in
accordance with the requirements of SMACNA’S
FRP Manual or equivalent.
2.10 Quality Assurance

All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed by expe-
rienced and qualified mechanics who have a minimum
of five years experience with the type of material and
products specified herein.
2.11 Locations of Drains

Drains shall be furnished and installed at the locations
specified on the drawings.

3.00 EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES CSI Reference 15800
3.01 Fans
Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, fans The “Fans” schedule included in the specification
of the model(s), size(s), type(s), and capacity or equiv- can be used to indicate the desired equipment.
alent indicated by the “Fan Schedule” which forms a
part of this specification. Field fabricated curbs for power roof ventilators
should be detailed and specified under “Roofing”
section of specifications. Prefabricated metal curbs
may be obtained from the fan manufacturer or
manufactured by a sheet metal contractor. Verify
type and specification section.
Performance of all units shall be based on tests con-

ducted in accordance with AMCA 210____, “Labora- Give specific AMCA test code number.
tory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.” Fan rotors
shall be statically and dynamically balanced by the fan
manufacturer.
The motor and fan assembly shall be isolated from the
base with ______ vibration insulators. (rubber) (other)
3.02 Scrubbers
Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, air Fill in selected manufacturer’s name and pertinent
scrubber(s) manufactured by _____, Model No. data. Equipment should be constructed of FRP or
_____, or approved equal, rated at ______ SCFM, at other material suitable for the environment.
_____ in. wg (Pa) static pressure, complete with all ap-
purtenances and accessories as required to complete
the installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.03 Hoods, Fume

Furnish and install fume hoods as shown and detailed See Sections 4 and 5 in the Industrial Ventilation
on the drawings. Manual for design criteria. Also coordinate work
with CSI Division 11.
3.04 Louvers and Ventilator Heads

Furnish and install FRP air–handling system louvers
and ventilator heads where shown on the drawings.
The louvers shall be fabricated of FRP and in accor-
dance with SMACNA’s FRP Manual.

3.05 Motors and Bases
Furnish all motors and bases of the size and character- Provide type, enclosure, frame, etc., as well as rat-
istics shown on the appropriate schedules for operation ing in appropriate schedules.
of all air–handling equipment called for by this speci-
fication.
3.06 Balancing and Adjusting

Air performance in all air handling and air distribution
systems shall be tested, balanced, and adjusted. This
work shall be performed with calibrated instruments in
accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Systems Test-
ing, Adjusting & Balancing Manual, ____ Edition. All
instruments used for measurement shall be accurate
and calibration histories for each instrument shall be
available for examination. Accuracy of measurement
shall be in accordance with the SMACNA Standards.
______ copies of final test reports shall be submitted Fill in total number of copies required for owner, en-
on appropriate SMACNA reporting forms. gineer, etc.
3.07 Guarantee
The Air–Handling Contractor, within 12 months from
substantial completion and acceptance of the project
or from the date that any air handling system in whole
or in part, or any separate piece of equipment or com-
ponent thereof is placed in operation with the authori-
zation of the owner or his agent, whichever is earlier,
shall repair or replace any equipment found to be de-
fective or of inferior workmanship, without cost to the
owner.


APPENDIX A
DEVELOPMENT OF THE
TABLES
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) is deeply indebted to
the organizations listed below who, together with SMACNA contractors, contributed their combined expertise to the
development of the duct construction standards described in this publication. SMACNA also gratefully acknowledges
their material contributions in connection with the Laboratory Test Program performed for SMACNA by Dr. Joseph
M. Plecnik, of the Civil Engineering Department of California State University.
Ashland Chemical, Inc., Columbus, Ohio
Xerxes Heil Process Equipment, Avon, Ohio
Mesa Fiberglass, Inc., Denver, Colorado
Paramount Fiberglass, Inc., Rancho Cucamonga, California
Xerxes Corporation, Anaheim, California

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT OF THE TABLES
A.1 INTRODUCTION the ratio of critical buckling pressure (pcr) to actual

vacuum (p).
This Appendix summarizes the criteria for the estab-

lishment of the FRP Duct Construction Tables, devel- In the case of the filament wound laminates, the thick-
oped for SMACNA by Dr. Joseph M. Plecnik of the ness varies from 0.140 in. (3.6 mm) for S1 laminate to
Civil Engineering Department of California State Uni- 0.540 in. (13.7 mm) for S21 laminate. The cylinders
versity, at Long Beach, California. were treated as orthotropic, with different properties in
the hoop and axial directions. For each diameter of duct,
the design safety factor (S.F.) was evaluated given an in-
ternal pressure (in. wg) and a laminate combination. The
A.2 DESIGN PROCEDURES FOR ROUND
results are presented in Table A-2 (Table A-2M). The
FRP DUCTS
safety factor is the ratio of critical buckling pressure (pcr)
to actual vacuum (p).
To create the tables for Round FRP Duct in Chapter

Five, two types of laminate construction were consid- A.2.1 Design for Vacuum (Type I and II Lami-
ered: nates)
a. RTP–1, Type I and Type II laminates, and In all cases the design was controlled by buckling due
to vacuum, but strains due to internal pressure and self
weight (bending) were also checked. Deflections were
b. Filament Wound (Type X) laminates. evaluated to make sure they remain under the maxi-
mum allowable of 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) The critical
buckling pressure (pcr) was taken from Ref. A.1, where
expressions corresponding to short, long, and very
Properties of the laminates considered for the shell
long cylinders under vacuum (lateral external pres-
were obtained as follows:
sure) are presented. The length of all ducts or distance
between supports was assumed to be 10 ft (3.05 m),
and the ducts were treated as long cylinders, for which
From the RTP–1 Standard, Type I and Type II lami- Equation 11–1 of Ref. A.1 gives:
nates as presented in Table 5-3. In addition, a (V, 3M)
laminate combination was included with the same
properties as those of Type I laminates, whose nominal 5.5 ( D Θ ) 3∕4 γ 1∕2 [Bx (1 − m′x m′ Θ)]1∕4
thicknesses vary from 0.14 in. (3.6 mm) for (V, 3M) to p cr =
L R3∕2
0.48 in. (12.3 mm) for (V, 11M). All Type I laminates
have a modulus of elasticity (E) of 1x106 psi (6900
MPa). where
D Θ = bending stiffness of the shell wall in the

For Type II laminates the modulus of elasticity varies hoop direction, in.–lb.
as follows: for 0.22 in. (5.6 mm) nominal thickness
laminate it is 1.3x106 psi (8950 MPa), for the 0.29 in. γ 1∕2 = coefficient introduced to reduce theoreti-
(7.4 mm) laminate it is 1.4x106 psi (9650 MPa), and cal results (assumed as 0.90)
for the 0.37 in. (9.4 mm) and greater laminates it is
1.5x106 psi (10,300 MPa). B x = extension stiffness of the shell wall in the
longitudinal direction, lb/in.
The design of the shell thickness in all cases is con- m′ x , m′Θ = Poisson’s ratios associated with ex-
trolled by vacuum. The required thicknesses for Types tension in the axial and hoop directions, respec-
I and II laminates were obtained for vacuum (negative tively.
pressure) varying from 5 to 30 in. wg (1250 to 7450
Pa), in increments of 2.5 in. wg (600 Pa). The results L = length of cylinder (assumed 120 in.)
presented in Table A-1 (Table A-1M) correspond to a
safety factor (S.F.) of at least 4.0. The safety factor is R = radius of cylinder, in.
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition A.1

Laminates Types I and II may be considered as isoto-
pLE
2∕5
pic materials, then t min = 1.881 R3∕5
m′ x = m′Θ = m (assumed as 0.30) A.2.2 Check Design for Positive Internal

Pressure and Dead Load Combined
Bx = Et
1 − m2
The design check was based on allowable strains for
DΘ = Et 3 internal pressure and dead load (bending). The maxi-
12(1 − m 2) mum allowable strain was taken as 1000 ms, which for
all combinations of laminate, duct diameter and pres-
sure, was greater than the actual strain. Therefore, the
where design due to vacuum still governed the design.
E = modulus of elasticity (lb/in.2)

The following expressions were used to evaluate the
t = shell thickness (in.) strains:
To check for internal pressure:

Substituting into the equation for pcr :
3∕4 1∕4
5.5  Et 3
12(1−m2)
 γ 1∕2  Et
(1−m2)
 (1 − m 2)1∕4
σ H =hoop stress due to internal pressure
p cr =
L R 3∕2 σ H = PD
3∕4 2t
=
5.5 γ1∕2 Et 5∕2
L R 3∕2
1
12(1 − m 2)
 Á H = hoop strain due to internal pressure
σH
ÁH = = PD ≤ 0.001
E 2Et
To find a minimum thickness, tmin, which gives a de-
sign with a safety factor of at least S.F.,
To check for bending due to dead load:
S.F. = pcr / p or pcr = (S.F.)p

Assume simply supported with L = 120 in.
then
w = weight per unit length
3∕4
(S.F.)p =
5.5 γ 1∕2 Et min 5∕2
L R3∕2
 1
12(1 − m 2)
 w = πDt S.W.
where S.W. = specific weight (assumed

1.8γ water)
Solving for tmin,
M = wL
2
8
2∕5 σ A = bending stress (axial direction)
  pLE
2∕5
(S.F.)[12(1 − m 2)]3∕4
t min = R3∕5
5.5 γ 1∕2
w L 2∕8 S.W. L 2
σA = M = =
S π D (t∕4)
2 2D
which, for S.F. = 4, m = 0.30 and γ 1∕2 = 0.90, becomes: Á A = axial strain due to bending (self weight)
A.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

σA S.W. L 2 um (lateral external pressure) are presented. The
ÁA = = length of all ducts, or distance between supports was
E 2DE
assumed to be 10 ft (3.05 m), and the ducts were
treated as long cylinders, for which Eq. 11–1 of Ref.
To check for internal pressure and dead load (bending) A.1 gives:
combined:
5.5 (D Θ) 3∕4 γ 1∕2 [ Bx (1 − m′x m′ Θ) ]1∕4

p cr =
Á T = (ÁH 2 + Á A 2)1∕2 L R3∕2
where
 
1∕2
S.W.
2
2
L
ÁT = PD
2Et
 +
2DE
2
≤ 0.001 D Θ = bending stiffness of the shell wall in the
hoop direction, in.–lb.
γ 1∕2 = coefficient introduced to reduce theoreti-

A.2.3 Check Deflection cal results (assumed as 0.90)
B x = extension stiffness of the shell wall in the

The deflection of the duct due to its own weight was longitudinal direction, lb/in.
calculated. In all cases, the resulting deflection was
significantly less than 0.50 in. (12.7 mm), which was m′ x , m′Θ = Poisson’s ratios associated with ex-
considered the maximum allowable. The following tension in the axial and hoop directions, respec-
expressions and assumptions were used: tively ( m′ x , m′Θ assumed 0.30).
L = length of cylinder (assumed 120 in.)

R = radius of cylinder, in.
∆ max = 5wL
4
384 EI The values for D Θ and B x are taken from the laminate
properties developed for each laminate combination,
such as those listed in Tables A-3, A-4, and A-5.
where
Then the safety factor was calculated
w = πDt S.W.
I = πD 3 t p cr
8 S.F. = p
substituting, The results in Table A-2 (Table A-2M) show these

safety factors, for values equal to 3.0 or greater. Blank
5 S.W. L4 spaces indicate a safety factor less than 3.0 and regular
∆ max = ≤ 0.50 in. (12.7 mm)
48ED 2 print indicates a safety factor of 3.0 or greater.
A.2.4 Design for Vacuum (Filament Wound A.2.5 Check Design for Positive Internal
Laminates) Pressure and Dead Load Combined
The critical buckling pressure (pcr) was taken from The design check was based on allowable strains for
Ref. A.1, where expression corresponding to short, internal pressure and dead load (bending). The maxi-
long, and very long orthotropic cylinders under vacu- mum allowable strain was taken as 1000 ms, which for

all combinations of laminate, duct diameter and pres- Á T = (ÁH 2 + Á A 2)1∕2
sure, was greater than the actual strain. Therefore, the
design due to vacuum still governed the design.
 
1∕2
 
2 2
PD S.W. L 2
The following expressions were used to evaluate the ÁT = + ≤ 0.001
2EH t 2DE A
strains:
To check for internal pressure: A maximum allowable deflection of 0.50 in. (12.7
mm) was used. All duct diameter and laminate com-
binations were checked. The resulting deflections
σ H = hoop stress due to internal pressure were significantly lower than the maximum allowa-
ble. The calculations were performed using the fol-
σ H = PD lowing expressions:
2t
Á H = hoop strain due to internal presssure

σH
ÁH = = PD ≤ 0.001
EH 2E H t
∆ max = 5wL
4
where E H is the hoop modulus of elasticity. 384 EI
To check for bending due to dead load: where
w = πDt S.W.
E = EA
w = weight per unit length I = πD 3 t

8
w = πDt S.W.
where S.W. = specific weight substituting,
5 S.W. L4
M = wL
2
∆ max = ≤ 0.50 in. (12.7 mm)
8 48EAD 2
σ A = bending stress (axial direction)

A.3 DESIGN PROCEDURES FOR
w L 2∕8 S.W. L 2
σA = M = = RECTANGULAR FRP DUCTS
S π D 2 (t∕4) 2D
Á A = axial strain due to bending (self weight) A.3.1 Introduction
σA S.W. L 2
ÁA = =
EA 2DE A The following design procedure was used to develop the
tables for FRP rectangular ducts in Chapter 6. Duct di-
where E A is the axial modulus of elasticity. mensions from 12 to 96 in. (300 to 2450 mm) are consid-
ered with several variations of width and height. Design
static pressure varied from –30 to +30 in. wg (–7450 to
To check for internal pressure and dead load (bending) +7450 Pa). When necessary, stiffeners are provided in
combined: the transverse direction of the ducts.

A.3.2 Design Procedure for Ducts Without
Stiffeners σ b−A = ω (Lt)2
2

3(u − tanh u)
u2 tanh u

Design of ducts without stiffeners was performed taken
and the tensile membrane stress is
into account the effect of membrane stresses in duct
walls, the rotation at the corners due to difference in
length of horizontal and vertical walls, and the P − ∆
E u2
effect. The design procedures is described next. σm = ( t )2
3(1 − ν 2) L
A.3.2.1 Analysis of Long Plate with Fixed and

By combining σb–A and σm the stresses in the top and
Held Edges
bottom surfaces at the fixed edges are calculated.
Initially the walls are assumed to be fixed and held at σ A = σm  σ b−A

the corners and that they behave as long plates acting
in the transverse direction. When a transverse pressure
acts on a panel under this support conditions, tensile or The bending stress at midspan is calculated as follows:
membrane stresses (σ M) are developed in addition to
the bending stresses. Tensile forces become larger as
deflection increases. The solution to this problem was
σ b−c = ( 62 )[ ωL − M A − M m ]
2
taken from Ref. A.2. The results obtained from this t 8
analysis were the stresses in the top and bottom sur-
faces of the plate at both the fixed edges (σ A) and mid-
span (σ B). where
σb−A t 2
MA =
The maximum deflection at midspan is given by 6
M m = σm t ∆ max
∆ max = ωL [244 ( u + u − u
4 2
)]
384D u 2 sinh u tanh u
Then the total stresses in the surfaces of the plate at
midspan are:
where
σ B = σm  σ b−c
w = uniformly distributed transverse load act-
ing on a strip of unit width
= (0.0361)(column of water, in.) A.3.2.2 Evaluation of the Effect of Rotation of
the Corners
L = transverse span of panel
D= Et 3 The results obtained previously from the fixed and

12(1 − ν2) held condition were modified to account for the rota-
tion of the corner of the ducts. This rotation is pro-
duced by unequal dimensions of the horizontal and
and u is obtained from the expression vertical walls of a duct. Since no program is available
to combine the effect of membrane stresses as calcu-
lated in section A.3.2.1 and rotation of corners, the fol-
E 2 t8 81 27 9 lowing approach is taken to evaluate the effect of this
=− − + 27 +
(1 − ν2) 2 ω 2 L8 16 u 7 tanh u 16 u 6 sinh 2 u 4 u 8 8 u 6 rotation. Finite element (FE) analysis is performed for
each cross–section (1 in. (12.7 mm) wide in the longi-
tudinal direction of the duct) to determine the bending
The bending stress at the edges is given by moments at the edge and midspan of the largest side of

the duct, as well as the maximum deflection (also at plate were taken from the size of the duct wall and sepa-
midspan). Those results include the effects of rotation ration between transverse stiffeners. To the second di-
at the corners and P − ∆ effect. Amplification factors mension, 3 in. (75 mm) on each side were subtracted be-
f A, f B, and f ∆ were obtained for bending moments at cause of the stiffener and its additional bond.
the edge and midspan, and for deflection, respectively.
These factors are the ratio of results obtained from FE
analysis and results obtained by analyzing a plate fixed
The analysis of stresses and deflections was performed
and not held at the edges. Separate analysis is per-
by using a model presented in Ref. A.3. This model
formed for ducts under vacuum and internal pressure.
takes into consideration the development of mem-
brane stresses in addition to the bending stresses. The
model is based on the Ritz method applied to a plate
A.3.2.3 Calculate Factored Stresses and with large deflections. Equations of equilibrium are
Deflections derived by minimizing the energy expression with re-
spect to variations in displacement functions. An
approximate solution is obtained by assuming expres-
The results obtained by considering a fixed and held sions for the displacement functions. Ref. A.3 gives
plate (from section A.3.2.1) were modified by the corre- numerical values for the constants involved in the as-
sponding factors f A, f B, and f ∆. Therefore, the final fac- sumed functions. The constants are functions of q, ν,
and β
tored stresses are σ A fA and σ A fB at the edge and midspan
respectively, and the factored deflection is ∆ max f∆
where
A.3.2.4 Selection of Required Wall Thick-
q = ωb
4
nesses
Dt
β = side ratio of the plate

Calculations were performed as described in sections
= B/A
A.3.2.1, A.3.2.2, and A.3.2.3 for several thicknesses
and duct sizes. Design thicknesses are chosen so that
the maximum allowable stress is 2300 psi (15.9 MPa)
and the maximum allowable deflection is 1/2 in. (12.7 Maximum deflection (at the center) and stress (at the
mm) for ducts under internal pressure and 3/4 in. (19.1 middle of the long side) are given respectively by
mm) under vacuum. The results are listed in the design
tables of Chapter 6.
∆ max = β 4 α 00
A.3.3 Design Procedure for Ducts with Stiff-

eners
and
To design ducts with transverse stiffeners, it is taken

advantage of the two–way action of the plates under σ max = 4β 4 (α 00 + β 2α 02) − 2β 4(C00 + C02β 2)
uniform pressure. The analysis and design procedures
are described next.
where α 00, α 02, C 00, and C 02 are constants that appear
in the expressions for displacement functions. Values
A.3.3.1 Analysis of Rectangular Plate with of ∆ max and σ max were obtained based on numerical
Fixed and Held Edges values given in Ref. A.3 for β = 1, 2/3, and 1/2. This
method sometimes gives conservative results for β =
2/3 and 1/2. Because of this, a check was performed us-
Deflection and maximum stress were calculated for rec- ing the case of a very long plate ( β = 0) as described
tangular plates uniformly loaded. Dimensions of the in section A.3.3.1 of this Appendix.

A.3.3.2 Selection of Required Wall Thick- mm) diameter duct or 48–B duct, had an average thick-
nesses ness of 0.310 in. (7.9 mm).
Two filament wound round ducts were also fabricated

With several cases analyzed for 10, 20, and 30 in. wg for this test program. A 24 in. (600 mm) diameter duct
(2450, 4950, and 7450 Pa) pressure, the design thick- was constructed using laminate construction P5 and a
ness was selected to meet the requirement that the 60 in. (1500 mm) diameter duct with a laminate
stress be less than 2300 psi (15.9 MPa) and the deflec- construction R7. Thicknesses were checked by taking
tion less than 1/2 in. (12.7 mm). ultrasound readings. The 24 in. (600 mm) diameter
duct with a nominal thickness of 0.220 in. (5.6 mm),
A.4 EXPERIMENTAL EVALUATION OF had an average measured thickness of 0.213 in. (5.4
ROUND FRP DUCTS mm). The 60 in. (1500 mm) diameter duct, with a nom-
inal thickness of 0.26 in. (6.6 mm), had an average
A.4.1 Introduction measured thickness of 0.283 in. (7.2 mm).
Four circular ducts were tested under a maximum 40 All ducts were capped at their ends. The 48 in. (1200
in. wg (9950 Pa) vacuum and the fifth duct was tested mm) and 60 in. (1500 mm) diameter ducts were rein-
up to buckling type failure. The objective of these tests forced with a wood stiffener at each of their end caps
was to determine the adequacy of the design for elastic to avoid excessive bending stresses. No other stiffen-
stability, since buckling is the determinant factor in the ers were provided.
design for round ducts. All these five ducts are rated
for a 20 in. wg (4950 Pa) vacuum. A.4.3 Test Setup
The Type I (per RTP–1) laminates were fabricated The setup for the vacuum test of the circular ducts was
with E–type chopped glass with a fiber length of 1 in. exactly the same used for testing the rectangular ducts.
(12.7 mm) to 1–1/2 in. (38.1 mm) and using two C–
veils (10 mil (0.25 mm) each). The filament wound A.4.4 Test Procedure
duct was fabricated as shown in Table A-3 and Table
A-4. The corrosion barrier consisted of two C–veils The test consisted in applying pressure and vacuum to
(10 mil (0.25 mm) each) followed by a 0.100 in.(2.5 the ducts at increment levels used for rectangular
mm) chopped liner. After the chopped liner, filament ducts. Since the ducts were designed for 20 in. wg
winding at 63_ (with respect to the longitudinal axis of (4950 Pa) vacuum, they were subjected to a maximum
the duct) provided the remaining thickness of the duct. of 40 in. wg (9950 Pa) vacuum with exception of the
The resin used to manufacture all round duct was an 48–B duct which was loaded to a higher vacuum.
isophthalic polyester. All round ducts were 10 ft (3.05 While the vacuum was being applied, the ducts were
m) long. inspected for any indication of instability or buckling.
Strains were measured for all ducts under both pres-
A.4.2 Description of Duct Specimens sure and vacuum load conditions.
Three Type I laminates (or RTP–1) round ducts were A.4.5 Stresses and Strains
tested: one 18 in. (450 mm) and two 48 in. (1200 mm)
diameter ducts. Nominal thicknesses of the structural Strains and resultant stresses were obtained on all
layer for these ducts is 0.172 in. (4.4 mm) and 0.301 round ducts at all load increments. Resultant strains
in. (7.6 mm), respectively. Actual thicknesses were closely coincide with the theoretical strains as given
measured using ultrasound. For the 18 in. (450 mm) di- by the traditional formulas of PR/t and PR/2t for hoop
ameter duct, 8 readings indicated variations of the and axial stresses respectively; where P is the pressure,
thickness between 0.165 in. (4.2 mm), and 0.187 in. R is the radius of the cylinder, and t is the wall thick-
(4.7 mm), with an average of 0.177 in. (4.5 mm). For ness.
the first 48 in. (1200 mm) diameter duct, which will be
labelled the 48–A duct herein, the thickness variation A.4.6 Test Results
was from 0.245 to 0.305 in. (6.6 to 7.7 mm), with an
average for 8 readings of 0.274 in. (6.9 mm). Thick- All round ducts were initially subjected to 50 in. wg
nesses of both the 18 in. (450 mm) diameter and 48–A (12.4 kPa) pressure. The strain levels measured were
ducts are slightly below the design thickness for a 20 all very low relative to acceptable standard of 1000 ms
in. wg (4950 Pa) vacuum. The second 48 in. (1200 used throughout most of the fiberglass industry.

Under vacuum, all ducts were subjected to 40 in. wg. 3. Under vacuum loading, buckling is the con-
(9950 Pa). The 18, 24, and 60 in. (450, 600, and 1500 trolling design condition since stresses and
mm) diameter ducts resisted the maximum vacuum strains are generally very low. The buckling
without any indication of elastic instability or buckling. analysis as presented above accurately pre-
There was no indication of any other type of damage in dicts the buckling failure of round ducting.
any of these three ducts. Strains measured on the 24 in.
(600 mm) diameter duct were very small, well below the
1000 ms limit given above. This confirms that strain is not 4. The additional stresses or strains produced by
the controlling design factor for circular ducts subjected different types of support conditions must be
to vacuum. considered when analyzing localized stress
conditions in round ducting.
The 48–A duct was also loaded to the maximum value

of 40 in. wg (9950 Pa) vacuum. However, this duct 5. When applicable, stresses induced by wind or
buckled suddenly as the maximum vacuum was reach- seismic loads must be added to the analysis
ed. The buckling occurred at the mid–length of the presented.
duct and over an area of approximately 180_ circum-
ferential direction and 36 in. (900 mm) in axial direc-
tion with the depression of approximately 5 in. (125 6. Based on the test results, it is recommended
mm) at its deepest point. The buckled shape had a total that the analytical procedures described earli-
of 2 lobes separated approximately 90_ apart. As noted er be accepted as a reasonable design method
earlier, the shell for the 48 in. (1200 mm) diameter duct for round fiberglass ducting.
was determined to be thinner than the nominal design
thickness. The 48–B duct with a shell thickness of
0.310 in. (7.9 mm) was loaded up to failure. This duct A.5 EXPERIMENTAL EVALUATION OF
buckled at 67 in. wg (16.7 kPa) vacuum, which is sig- RECTANGULAR FRP DUCTS
nificantly higher than the design 20 in. wg (4950 Pa)
vacuum.
This Appendix contains the results of a series of tests
Strains measured in the duct were well below the max- performed on rectangular fiberglass reinforced plastic
imum allowable. Again it was confirmed that elastic (FRP) ducts. A total of four ducts with the following
instability governs the design of these round ducts cross–sectional dimensions were tested: 20” x 20”
rather than strength. (500 x 500 mm), 36” x 18” (900 x 450 mm), 36” x 72”
(900 x 1800 mm), and 72” x 72” (1800 x 1800 mm).
This Appendix contains description of the ducts, test
A.4.7 Conclusions for Round Duct setup, test procedure and results. Data obtained con-
sisted of deflections and strains at critical locations.
All ducts were tested under vacuum and internal pres-
sure (up to 30 in. wg (7450 Pa)).
Based on the experimental results reported by Dr.
Plecnik, the following conclusions were reached:
Section A.5.1 of this Appendix presents the testing
of a 20” x 20” (500 x 500 mm) and a 36” x 18” (900
1. Round fiberglass duct under pressure or vacu- x 450 mm) ducts. Section A.5.2 refers to testing of
um may be accurately analyzed for stresses and a 36” x 72” (900 x 1800 mm) duct and section A.5.3
strains using conventional PR/t and PR/2t for contains the testing of a 72” x 72” (1800 x 1800 mm)
hoop and axial stresses respectively. duct. All ducts were manufactured with isophthalic
polyester resin and E–glass. All glass reinforcement
consisted of chopped glass with a fiber length of 1 in.
2. Under typical pressure conditions, the fiber- (12.7 mm) to 1–1/2 in. (38.1 mm). The laminate
glass round duct is subjected to very low properties were equal to or greater than the speci-
strain and stress levels. However, significant fied, by RTP–1 Type I laminate. The actual coupon
stress/strain levels may occur if additional test results for the four ducts are given in the Table
wind, seismic or other type of loads are con- A-5. On the interior surface, two C–veils (10 mils
sidered. (0.25 mm) each) were used as the corrosion barrier.

In evaluating the test results, the maximum allowable A.5.1.2 Description of Duct Specimens
flexural stress of 2300 psi (15.9 MPa) results in a safety
factor of about 9. The maximum deflections of the
sides of the duct are 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) and 3/4 in. (19.1 The ducts were made of fiberglass reinforced plastic
mm) for pressure and vacuum, respectively. with a 120 in. (3050 mm) length. Reinforcing layers
consisting of chopped glass construction were added
to the outside four corners of the ducts. The width of
this extra bond was 3 in. (75 mm) for the 20” x 20” (500
A.5.1 Testing of a 20” x 20” (500 x 500 mm) x 500 mm) duct and 3–1/2 in. (90 mm) for the 36” x 18”
and a 36” x 18” (900 x 450 mm) FRP (900 x 450 mm) duct extending from the curvature of
Duct the corners. Both ends of the ducts were sealed by end
caps bonded to the duct ends by additional reinforcing
layers. Figure A-1 and Figure A-2 show cross–sections
of the ducts.
A.5.1.1 Introduction
Thicknesses were measured for two walls of each duct.
For the 20” x 20” (500 x 500 mm) duct, average thick-
nesses of 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) and 0.284 in. (7.2 mm)
A 20” x 20” (500 x 500 mm) and a 36” x 18” (900 x 450 were obtained by ultrasound readings on the top and
mm) FRP Duct was tested under vacuum and internal side walls respectively. For the 18” x 36” (450 x 900
pressure. Data collected during testing consisted of mm) duct, average thicknesses were 0.289 in. (7.3
strains and deflections of the walls under 10, 20, and mm) and 0.285 in. (7.2 mm) for the top and side walls
30 in. wg (2450, 4950, and 7450 Pa) respectively.

S.F. = 4
L (in.) 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
Vacuum LAMINATE TYPE I TYPE II TYPE I TYPE II
p (in.
( wg)g) E (psi) 1.0E+06 1.3E+06 1.4E+06 1.5E+06 1.0E+06 1.3E+06 1.4E+06 1.5E+06
D (in.) 12 12 12 12 24 24 24 24
5.0 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37
7.5 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37
10.0 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37
12.5 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37
15.0 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37
17.5 0.14 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37
20.0 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37
22.5 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37
25.0 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.22 0.29 0.37
27.5 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.22 0.29 0.37
30.0 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.29 0.37
S.F. = 4
L (in.) 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
Vacuum LAMINATE TYPE I TYPE II TYPE II TYPE II TYPE I TYPE II
p (in.
D (in.) 36 36 36 36 48 48 48 48
5.0 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37
7.5 0.18 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37
10.0 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.22 0.29 0.37
12.5 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.29 0.37
15.0 0.27 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.31 0.29 0.37
17.5 0.27 0.29 0.37 0.31 0.29 0.37
20.0 0.27 0.29 0.37 0.31 0.29 0.37
22.5 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.35 0.29 0.37
25.0 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.35 0.37
27.5 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.35 0.37
30.0 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.40 0.37
S.F. = 4
L (in.) 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
p (in.
D (in.) 60 60 60 60 72 72 72 72
5.0 0.23 0.22 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.22 0.29 0.37
7.5 0.27 0.29 0.37 0.27 0.29 0.37
10.0 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.31 0.29 0.37
12.5 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.35 0.29 0.37
15.0 0.31 0.29 0.37 0.35 0.37
17.5 0.35 0.37 0.40 0.37
20.0 0.35 0.37 0.40 0.37
22.5 0.40 0.37 0.44 0.37
25.0 0.40 0.37 0.44 0.37
27.5 0.40 0.37 0.48 0.41
30.0 0.44 0.37 0.48 0.41
Table A--1 Nominal Laminate Thickness (in.)

Given Duct Diameter and Vacuum
NOTES:
a. These three tables include a few duct diameters for illustrative purposes only.
b. The tables in Chapter 5 are a representation of the same data but in a more compact and practical
presentation.

S.F. = 4
L (mm) 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050
((Pa)) E (kPa) 6.9E+06 9.0E+06 9.7E+06 10.3E+06 6.9E+06 9.0E+06 9.7E+06 10.3E+06
D (mm) 300 300 300 300 600 600 600 600
1250 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40
1870 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40
2500 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40
3100 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40
3750 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40
4350 3.56 5.59 7.37 9.40 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40
5000 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40
5600 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40
6200 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 6.86 5.59 7.37 9.40
6850 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 6.86 5.59 7.37 9.40
7500 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 6.86 7.37 9.40
S.F. = 4
L (mm) 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050
((Pa)) E (kPa) 6.9E+06 9.0E+06 9.7E+06 10.3E+06 6.9E+06 9.0E+06 9.7E+06 10.3E+06
D (mm) 900 900 900 900 1200 1200 1200 1200
1250 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40
1870 4.57 5.59 7.37 9.40 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40
2500 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40 6.86 5.59 7.37 9.40
3100 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40 6.86 7.37 9.40
3750 6.86 5.59 7.37 9.40 7.87 7.37 9.40
4350 6.86 7.37 9.40 7.87 7.37 9.40
5000 6.86 7.37 9.40 7.87 7.37 9.40
5600 7.87 7.37 9.40 8.89 7.37 9.40
6200 7.87 7.37 9.40 8.89 9.40
6850 7.87 7.37 9.40 8.89 9.40
7500 7.87 7.37 9.40 10.16 9.40
S.F. = 4
L (mm) 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050 3050
((Pa)) E (kPa) 6.9E+06 9.0E+06 9.7E+06 10.3E+06 6.9E+06 9.0E+06 9.7E+06 10.3E+06
D (mm) 1500 1500 1500 1500 1800 1800 1800 1800
1250 5.84 5.59 7.37 9.40 6.86 5.59 7.37 9.40
1870 6.86 7.37 9.40 6.86 7.37 9.40
2500 7.87 7.37 9.40 7.87 7.37 9.40
3100 7.87 7.37 9.40 8.89 7.37 9.40
3750 7.87 7.37 9.40 8.89 9.40
4350 8.89 9.40 10.16 9.40
5000 8.89 9.40 10.16 9.40
5600 10.16 9.40 11.18 9.40
6200 10.16 9.40 11.18 9.40
6850 10.16 9.40 12.19 10.41
7500 11.18 9.40 12.19 10.41
Table A--1M Nominal Laminate Thickness (mm)

Given Duct Diameter and Vacuum
NOTES:
a. These three tables include a few duct diameters for illustrative purposes only.
presentation.

DIAMETER (in.) = 12 12
DUCT LENGTH (in.) = 120
Pressure LAMINATE COMBINATION
(in. wg) S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21
5 32 61 101 154 222 308 412 536 682 851 1043
10 16 31 51 77 111 154 206 268 341 425 522
15 11 20 34 51 74 103 137 179 227 284 348
20 8 15 25 39 56 77 103 134 171 213 261
25 6 12 20 31 44 62 82 107 136 170 209
30 5 10 17 26 37 51 69 89 114 142 174
DIAMETER (in.) = 24
(in. wg.) S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21
5 11 22 36 54 79 109 146 190 241 301 369
10 5.6 11 18 27 39 54 73 95 121 150 184
15 3.7 7 12 18 26 36 49 63 80 100 123
20 5.4 9 14 20 27 36 47 60 75 92
25 4.3 7.1 11 16 22 29 38 48 60 74
30 6.0 9 13 18 24 32 40 50 61
DIAMETER (in.) = 48
5 4.0 7.7 13 19 28 38 51 67 85 106 130
10 3.8 6.3 10 14 19 26 34 43 53 65
15 4.2 6.4 9 13 17 22 28 35 43
20 3.2 4.8 6.9 10 13 17 21 27 33
25 3.9 5.6 7.7 10 13 17 21 26
30 3.2 4.6 6.4 9 11 14 18 22
DIAMETER (in.) = 72
5 4.2 6.9 10 15 21 28 36 46 58 71
10 3.4 5.2 7.6 10 14 18 23 29 35
15 3.5 5.0 7.0 9 12 15 19 24
20 3.8 5.2 7.0 9 12 14 18
25 3.0 4.2 5.6 7.3 9 12 14
30 3.5 4.7 6.1 8 10 12
Table A--2 Safety Factors Given Filament Wound

Laminate Combination and Vacuum
NOTES:
a. These four tables include a few duct diameters for illustrative purposes only. Long cylinder
assumed for all tables.
presentation.

DIAMETER (mm) = 300 300
DUCT LENGTH (mm) = 3050
(Pa) S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21
1250 32 61 101 154 222 308 412 536 682 851 1043
2500 16 31 51 77 111 154 206 268 341 425 522
3750 11 20 34 51 74 103 137 179 227 284 348
5000 8 15 25 39 56 77 103 134 171 213 261
6250 6 12 20 31 44 62 82 107 136 170 209
7500 5 10 17 26 37 51 69 89 114 142 174
DIAMETER (mm) = 600

(Pa) S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21
1250 11 22 36 54 79 109 146 190 241 301 369
2500 5.6 11 18 27 39 54 73 95 121 150 184
3750 3.7 7 12 18 26 36 49 63 80 100 123
5000 5.4 9 14 20 27 36 47 60 75 92
6250 4.3 7.1 11 16 22 29 38 48 60 74
7500 6.0 9 13 18 24 32 40 50 61
DIAMETER (mm) = 1200 1200

(Pa) S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21
1250 4.0 7.7 13 19 28 38 51 67 85 106 130
2500 3.8 6.3 10 14 19 26 34 43 53 65
3750 4.2 6.4 9 13 17 22 28 35 43
5000 3.2 4.8 6.9 10 13 17 21 27 33
6250 3.9 5.6 7.7 10 13 17 21 26
7500 3.2 4.6 6.4 9 11 14 18 22
DIAMETER (mm) = 1800

(Pa) S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21
1250 4.2 6.9 10 15 21 28 36 46 58 71
2500 3.4 5.2 7.6 10 14 18 23 29 35
3750 3.5 5.0 7.0 9 12 15 19 24
5000 3.8 5.2 7.0 9 12 14 18
6250 3.0 4.2 5.6 7.3 9 12 14
7500 3.5 4.7 6.1 8 10 12
Table A--2M Safety Factors Given Filament Wound
Laminate Combination and Vacuum
NOTES:
a. These four tables include a few duct diameters for illustrative purposes only. Long cylinder
assumed for all tables.
presentation.

SG--1 SG--2 SG--3
SG--4
TOP PANEL
ADDITIONAL
BOND
3 in. (75 mm)
SG--5
SIDE PANEL
DUCT
THICKNESS
1/2” (12.7 mm)
MINIMUM CORNER RADIUS
SG = STRAIN GAGE
FIGURE A--1 CROSS SECTION OF A 20” X 20” (500 X 500 mm) DUCT
SG--1 SG--2 SG--3
SG--4
TOP PANEL
ADDITIONAL
BOND
3–1/2 in.
(90 mm)
SIDE PANEL
SG--5
DUCT
THICKNESS
1” (25.4 mm)
MINIMUM CORNER RADIUS
SG = STRAIN GAGE
FIGURE A--2 CROSS SECTION OF A 36” X 18” (900 X 450 mm) DUCT

A.5.1.3 Test Setup A.5.1.5 Test Results for 20” x 20” (500 x 500
mm) Duct
All the duct specimens were subjected to both internal

pressure and vacuum. Using air pressure or vacuum Resultant deflections and strains were obtained by
pumps, the appropriate pressure and vacuum were ap- subtracting the zero reading from the readings taken at
plied to each duct at pre–determined levels. Figure A-3 10, 20, and 30 in. wg (2450, 4950, and 7450 Pa) respec-
provides a schematic of the test setup. A manometer was tively. The maximum strain of 2160 micro strains (ms)
used to control both the vacuum and pressure. occurs at the duct’s corner (SG–4) under a 30 in. wg
(7450 Pa) vacuum. This strain is equivalent to 2160 psi
(14.9 MPa) assuming a modulus of elasticity of 1x106
A total of five strain gages (SG) were placed on each psi (6.9x103 MPa). This stress is less than the allow-
duct specimen. All gages were located at mid length able of 2300 psi (15.9 MPa). All other stresses were
of the ducts. Three gages were placed on the top wall: well below this allowable stress. For 20 in. wg (4950
SG–1 was in the middle, SG–2 was placed approxi- Pa) pressure, the maximum strain was 1607 ms, which
mately 1 in. from the additional bond at the corners, corresponds to a stress of 1607 psi (11.1 MPa).
and SG–3 in the center of the additional bond. Gage
SG–4 was installed on the round corner. SG–5 was
placed in the middle of one of the side walls. All gages A significant fact is the difference between strains re-
were oriented in the transverse direction. corded by SG–1 and SG–5. Even though theoretically
both strains should be the same for a square duct, SG–5
gave strains approximately half of those recorded by
Deflections were measured at the center of both the top SG–1. This implies a thickness variation in the walls of
wall (next to SG–1) and the side wall (next to SG–5). the duct. The top wall deflected 0.31 in. (7.9 mm) where-
To measure deflections, fixed horizontal and vertical as the side wall only 0.14 in. (3.6 mm) under 30 in. wg
reference lines were used parallel to the top wall and (7450 Pa) pressure. However, these deflections are con-
side wall, respectively. sidered reasonable for this duct considering that the
deflection limit is 3/4 in. (19.1 mm) at the design condi-
tion of 10 in. wg (2450 Pa).
A.5.1.4 Test Procedure
Very similar results were obtained for the vacuum and

The tests consisted of applying vacuum and internal the internal pressure tests. The only difference is the
pressure to the ducts. Data consisted of deflections and change of sign for the strains and change of direction
strains measured at location described above. The 20” for deflections.
x 20” (500 x 500 mm) duct was tested first under vacu-
um and then under pressure and the 36” x 18” (900 x
450 mm) duct was tested first under pressure and then A.5.1.6 Test Results for 36” x 18” (900 x 450
under vacuum. mm) Duct
Initial deflection and strain readings were taken when Analysis of the strains showed the effect of the differ-
the ducts were under zero gage pressure. These read- ence in length of the long side and short side of the rec-
ings become the reference or zero readings. Then vac- tangular cross section. In this case, when vacuum is ap-
uum or pressure were applied up to 10 in. wg (2450 plied, SG–1 is under compression and SG–5 under
Pa). Pressure was maintained constant while a second tension. (This is in contrast to what was observed for
set of deflection and strain readings were taken. The the square duct where both SG–1 and SG–5 indicate
next step consisted of increasing the vacuum or pres- compression strain under vacuum.) The largest re-
sure from 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) to 20 in. wg (4950 Pa), corded strain of 1697 ms is at the corner (SG–4), but
where readings were again taken while the pressure even at 30 in. wg (7450 Pa) vacuum, the strain remains
was kept constant. The same procedure was repeated below the maximum allowable.
for a vacuum or pressure of 30 in. wg (7450 Pa). At this
point, the duct was visually examined for any damage.
Finally, the pressure or vacuum was reduced back to Deflections are more critical than strains for this duct.
zero. Under vacuum of 30 in. wg (7450 Pa), the top side had

A.16
TO MANOMETER
TO VACUUM PUMP
OR AIR LINE
FRP DUCT
SILICONE
SEALANT
120 in.
(2500 mm)
ELEVATION VIEW
HOLE TO APPLY
VACUUM / PRESSURE
20 in. (500 mm) 18 in. (450 mm)
FIGURE A--3 VACUUM / PRESSURE TEST OF FRP DUCT

20 in. 36 in.
(500 mm) (900 mm)
20” x 20” (500 x 500 mm) DUCT 36” x 18” (900 x 450 mm) DUCT
SIDE VIEW
a deflection of 0.84 in. (21.3 mm) at the center. The max- Wall thicknesses were measured by using ultrasound
imum allowable deflection for vacuum of 3/4 in. (19 equipment. Thickness of the 72 in. (1800 mm) wide
mm) is exceeded by 12%. At 20 in. wg (4950 Pa) vacu- panel, which will be called “Top Panel” herein, was
um, the deflection is 0.56 in. (14.2 mm), which is below measured at several points within the center area be-
the maximum limit. The effect of long side to short side tween the stiffener and one end of the duct. The aver-
length ratio is also evident on deflections. The short side age thickness of 8 readings was 0.354 in. (9 mm). The
deflected only 0.12 in.(3 mm) and 0.08 in. (2 mm) at 30 36 in. (900 mm) wide panel, which will be called “Side
in. wg (7450 Pa) and 20 in. wg (4950 Pa) vacuum, re- Panel” herein, had an average thickness of 0.360 in.
spectively. At the design pressure/vacuum of 10 in. wg (9.1 mm) within its center area between the stiffener
(2450 Pa) for a duct with a thickness equivalent to this and one of the duct’s end. Wall thicknesses are less
36” x 18” (900 x 450 mm) duct, deflections were signifi- than the design thickness of 0.387 in. (9.8 mm), how-
cantly lower than the maximum limits. Under 10 in. wg ever, the spacing from the center of the stiffener to the
(2450 Pa) vacuum, the deflection of the top panel was end of the duct is 49 in. (12.4 mm), less than the 54 in.
0.27 in. (6.9 mm), which is below the 0.75 in. (19.1 mm) (13.7 mm) design spacing.
limit.
Wall thickness was also measured at several points lo-

cated 8 to 12 in. (200 to 300 mm) from the corners of
The length of additional bonds at the corners can be
the ducts. The average of the thickness measurements
considered adequate. This may be concluded by analy-
in this area was 0.352 in. (8.9 mm). The center area of
sis of the strains recorded by SG–2, which is near the
the top panel had an initial curvature outward from the
end of the corner bond. Strains here are very small.
interior of the duct. At the center, the panel was
This indicates that the bond has been extended to
approximately 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) above the level of the
approximately the point of inflection where bending
edges. This curvature had an important effect on
stresses are minimum.
deflections of the duct under vacuum as it will be ex-
plained in section A.5.2.5.1 of this Appendix.
A.5.2 Testing of a 36” x 72” (900 x 1800 mm)

FRP Duct The corners of the duct were reinforced with addition-
al FRP layers in the longitudinal direction. The addi-
tional bond extended approximately 3–1/2 in. (90 mm)
to each side of the corners. The duct was closed at both
A.5.2.1 Introduction
ends with FRP walls reinforced with an external 2” x
4” (50 x 100 mm) wood stiffener, which was oriented
in the short dimension (36 in. (900 mm)) of the duct.
A 36” x 72” (900 x 1800 mm) FRP duct was tested un-
der vacuum and internal pressure (maximum of 30 in.
wg (7450 Pa)). This section contains a description of A.5.2.3 Test Setup
the specimen, test setup and procedure, and results.
This type of duct is rated for a design pressure/vacuum
of 10 in. wg (2450 Pa), and its design thickness is 0.387 The test specimen was prepared to be subjected to inter-
in. (9.8 mm) for a maximum stiffener spacing of 54 in. nal pressure and vacuum. A 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) diameter
(1350 mm), or thickness of 0.301 in. (7.6 mm) for a hole was drilled in the Top Panel. A hose was inserted in
stiffener spacing of 42 in. (1050 mm). this hole. Silicone sealant was placed around the hose
and hole to minimize pressure losses during testing. The
other end of the hose was connected to a vacuum pump
or an air line to apply vacuum and internal pressure re-
A.5.2.2 Description of Duct Specimen
spectively. A manometer was used to control the magni-
tude of vacuum or pressure.
The 98 in. (2500 mm) long FRP duct had a rectangular

cross section of 36 in. x 72 in. (900 x 1800 mm). The duct A total of six strain gages were installed. Two gages,
was reinforced at its mid length using an external 2 x 4 one in the axial direction and one in the transverse di-
(50 x 100 mm) wood stiffener with 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) FRP rection, were placed on the Top Panel and two on the
bond (all chopped construction). This stiffener was pro- Side Panel. These gages were located in the center of
vided around the entire perimeter of the duct. the panels, between the stiffener and one end of the

duct. The other two gages were installed on the stiffen- Deflections at the smaller or Side Panel and the Top
er. One gage was at midspan of the 72 in. (1800 mm) Stiffener under 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) vacuum were
long stiffener (“Top Stiffener”) and the other gage was approximately 0.23 in. (5.8 mm) and 0.10 in. (2.5
on the 36 in. (900 mm) stiffener (“Side Stiffener”). mm), respectively. These are less than the allowable
Two reference lines, one horizontal and one vertical, deflection.
were used to measure absolute displacement of the
panels and stiffener.
All strains measured in the panels and stiffeners are be-
low the maximum allowable, which assuming a modu-
A.5.2.4 Test Procedure lus of elasticity of 1x106 psi (6900 MPa) is 2300 ms.
The largest strain of 1250 ms (compression) at 10 in.
wg (2450 Pa) design vacuum was recorded in the axial
A series of three load/unload cycles was performed. direction at the center of the Top Panel. The Top Stiff-
First the duct was subjected to a pressure of 30 in. wg ener was under a compressive strain of approximately
(7450 Pa) vacuum and then released to zero. Then an 600 ms at the design vacuum.
internal pressure of 30 in. wg (7450 Pa) was applied
and released back to zero. Finally, another cycle of
vacuum up to 30 in. wg (7450 Pa) was applied. The duct did not show evidence of any type of failure.
The maximum test vacuum of 30 in. wg (7450 Pa) is
three times as high as the 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) design
vacuum.
During the first vacuum and internal pressure cycle,
strain and deflection readings were taken at 0, 5, 10,
20, and 30 in. wg (0, 1250, 2450, 4950, and 7450 Pa).
A.5.2.5.2 Pressure Test
For the second vacuum cycle, readings were taken ev-
ery 1 in. wg (250 Pa) up to 6 in. wg (1500 Pa) and at
8, 10, 15, 20, and 30 in. wg (2000, 2450, 3750, 4950,
After the first vacuum cycle the duct was subjected to
and 7450 Pa). The duct was examined during testing
a maximum pressure of 30 in. wg (7450 Pa), which is
to determine any type of visible damage.
three times the 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) pressure. Deflec-
tions are less than the allowable of 0.50 in. (12.7 mm)
for pressure. Deflections at the Top Panel, Side Panel
A.5.2.5 Test Results and Top Stiffener were 0.36 in. (9.1 mm), 0.18 in. (4.6
mm) and 0.10 in. (2.5 mm), respectively.
A.5.2.5.1 Vacuum Test

Also strains were below the allowable. At 10 in. wg
(2450 Pa) design pressure, strains in the Top Stiffener
Variation of deflection and strains throughout the two was 605 ms. Maximum strain in the panels was 490 ms.
vacuum cycles give similar results. Deflection of the
largest panel controls the design of this duct. At 10 in. wg
(2450 Pa) vacuum which is the design vacuum, the mea- The duct withstood the maximum test pressure of 30
sured deflection of the Top Panel was approximately 0.9 in. wg (7450 Pa) without any evidence of damage.
in. (22.9 mm). However, by examining the behavior of
the load–deflection curve and from the shape of the pan-
el, one can find an explanation for this apparently large A.5.3 Testing of a 72” x 72” (1800 x 1800 mm)
deflection. The slope of the curve between 2 and 5 in. wg FRP Duct
(500 to 1250 Pa) vacuum is much greater than after 5 in.
wg (1250 Pa). There is a significantly large increase in
deflection within this range. The deflection increment A.5.3.1 Introduction
within this range was almost 0.5 in. (12.7 mm). The rea-
son for this is that the initial curvature of the panel at its
center is reversed causing the sudden deflection incre- A 72” x 72” (1800 x 1800 mm) FRP duct was tested
ment. This would not have occurred if the panel were flat under vacuum and internal pressure (maximum of 30
initially. Then the total deflection at the design vacuum in. wg (7450 Pa)). This section contains a description
of 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) would be less than the maximum of the specimen, test setup and procedure, and results.
allowable of 0.75 in. (19.1 mm) for vacuum. This type of duct is rated for a design pressure/vacuum

of 10 in. wg (7450 Pa), and its design thickness is 0.387 A total of four strain gages were installed. Two gages
in. (9.8 mm) for a maximum stiffener spacing of 54 in. were placed on the Top Panel and two on the Side Panel,
(1350 mm), or thickness of 0.301 in. (7.6 mm) for a all in the center area of each panel. Of the two gages on
spacing of 42 in. (1050 mm). each panel, one was oriented in the longitudinal or axial
direction of the duct, and the other was in the transverse
or hoop direction. Two reference lines, one horizontal
A.5.3.2 Description of Duct Specimen and one vertical, were used to measure absolute deflec-
tion of the Top and Side Panels.
The 48 in. (1200 mm) long FRP duct has a cross sec-
tion of 72” x 72” (1800 x 1800 mm). Since the length A.5.3.4 Test Procedure
is 48 in. (1200 mm), no stiffener was necessary as part
of the design for the duct walls.
Two load/unload cycles were performed. First the duct
was subjected to a maximum of 30 in. wg (7450 Pa)
Wall thicknesses were measured by using ultrasound vacuum and then unloaded. In the next cycle the duct
equipment on two of the four sides of the panel. Thick- was pressurized to 30 in. wg (7450 Pa) internal pres-
ness of the Top Panel was measured at several points sure.
within the center area, with a resultant average of
0.383 in. (9.7 mm). Thickness was also measured on
During the vacuum test, strain and deflection readings
the Top Panel at several points 10 in. (250 mm) away
from one of the edges, where the average was 0.367 in. were taken at 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, and 30 in.
(9.3 mm). wg. (0, 500, 750, 1000, 1250, 1500, 2000, 2450, 3750,
4950, and 7450 Pa). For the internal pressure test, read-
ings were taken at 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, and 30 in.
wg (0, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2450, 3750, 4950, and
Thickness measured on the Side Panel had an average
7450 Pa).
of 0.403 in. (10.2 mm) at the center area of the panel.
Along one of the 72 in. (1850 mm) sides (10 in. (250
mm) away from the edge), the average thickness was
A.5.3.5 Test Results
0.36 in. (9.1 mm), and along one of the 48 in. (1200
mm) sides (12 in. (300 mm) away from the edge) the
average was 0.380 in. (9.7 mm). A.5.3.5.1 Vacuum Test
The duct corners were reinforced with additional FRP Deflection and strain data corresponding to the Top
layers in the longitudinal direction. This additional and Side Panels show a similar tendency. However,
bond extended approximately 3–1/2 in. (90 mm) to strains and deflections were in general larger for the
each side of the corners. To be able to perform the pres- Side Panel.
sure and vacuum tests, the duct was closed at both ends
with FRP walls reinforced with an external 2 to 4 in.
(50 x 100 mm) wood stiffener. The following results were obtained at the design 10
in. wg (2450 Pa) vacuum. Deflections at the center of
the panels were 0.62 in. (15.7 mm) and 0.77 in. (19.6
A.5.3.3 Test Setup mm) for the Top and Side Panel, respectively. This in-
dicates that the duct design produces deflections
which are at the limit of the 3/4 in. (19.1 mm) maxi-
The specimen was prepared to be subjected to internal mum allowable for vacuum. Strains, however, are sig-
pressure and vacuum. A 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) diameter nificantly below the maximum allowable. Strain
hole was drilled in the Side Panel. A hose was inserted curves indicate that at design 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) vacu-
in this hole. Silicone sealant was placed around the um, the largest strain was under 1000 ms at the center
hose and hole to minimize air leaks during testing. The side of the side panel in the axial direction. This strain
other end of the hose was connected to a vacuum pump corresponds to 1000 psi (6900 kPa) assuming a modu-
or an air line to apply vacuum and internal pressure re- lus of elasticity of 1x106 psi (6900 MPa) for the lami-
spectively. A manometer was used to control the mag- nate. Allowable stress was considered 2300 psi (15.9
nitude of vacuum and pressure. MPa) for design.

The duct was subjected to a maximum test vacuum of deflection limit appears to be reasonable
30 in. wg (2450 Pa) without failure. from both viewpoints of structural design and
practical field considerations.
A.5.3.5.2 Pressure Test

4. Under both vacuum and pressure conditions,
the theoretical design formulas described
At 10 in. wg (2450 Pa) internal pressure, deflections earlier adequately correlate with experimen-
and stains were lower than for vacuum. For both the tal results. In general, it appears that the
Top and Side Panels, deflections were 0.29 in. (7.4 theoretical design formulas are sightly con-
mm) at the center of the panels. This deflection is un- servative (up to about 20%) when comparing
der the maximum allowable design limit of 1/2 in. theoretical with experimental strains and
(12.7 mm) for internal pressure. Also, strains were be- stresses. The correlation between theoretical
low the allowable of 2300 ms (assuming a modulus of deflections of the shell walls and experimen-
elasticity of 1x106 psi (6900 MPa). The maximum re- tal results are generally within a 10 to 20%
corded strain was approximately 350 ms at the center maximum deviation.
of the Side Panel under the design pressure. This strain
was measured in the longitudinal direction of the duct.
5. The stiffeners under both vacuum and pres-
sure deflect less than theoretically predicted.
The duct withstood without failure the 30 in. wg (7450 The primary reason appears to be the higher
Pa) maximum test pressure. stiffness of the wood than is typically as-
sumed. Therefore, the design of the stiffeners
as given in appears conservative both from
A.5.4 Conclusions for Rectangular Duct the viewpoint of deflection, stress, and strain.
Based on the experimental results reported by Dr. 6. In addition to vacuum or pressure, all the
Plecnik, the following conclusions were reached: ducts given in the design tables of Chapter 6
may be supported at distances of 10 ft (3.05
m) or less without reducing the vacuum or
1. The behavior of the ducts under vacuum and pressure rating of the duct. Longer support
pressure are similar. The ratio of length to spacings require additional calculations con-
height of the walls greatly affects the design sidering the weight of the duct.
as was indicated in the design procedure.
7. The ducts considered in Chapter 6 assume that

2. Under vacuum, the walls of the duct are gen- wind or seismic loads are not present simulta-
erally controlled by the deflection rather than neously with the design pressure or vacuum
stress or strain design criteria. The limit of 3/4 conditions. If the duct is subjected to wind or
in. (19.1 mm) deflection under vacuum for seismic loading, additional analysis must be
the duct walls appears to be reasonable from performed with consideration given to the
the viewpoints of both the structural design maximum support spacing of the duct.
and practical field conditions.
8. Based on the test results, it is recommended

3. Under internal pressure, the deflection gener- that the analytical procedures described earli-
ally controls the design of the duct rather than er be accepted as a reasonable design method
stress or strain criteria. The 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) for rectangular fiberglass ducting.

E1 Et G
Poisson Ratio
psi x 10 6 (MPa) psi x 10 6 (MPa) psi x 10 6 (MPa)
5.420 (37,400) 0.660 (4600) 0.224 (1500) 0.300
1.000 (6900) 1.000 (6900) 0.400 (2800) 0.250
Table A--3 Material Properties For Filament Wound Laminates

Model In L–t Coordinates, Combination S–5 (For Round Duct)
Theta (ν) Thickness

Lamina # Material #
degrees in. (mm)
Two 10 mil (0.25 mm)

0
C–Veils (or synthetic veils)
1 2 Chopped Liner or Mat 0.100 (2.54)
2 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
3 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
4 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
5 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
6 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
7 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
Table A-- 4 Data for Each Lamina

(Theta (ν) Measured Clockwise from +Y Axis)
E1 Et G
Poisson Ratio
psi x 10 6 (MPa) psi x 10 6 (MPa) psi x 10 6 (MPa)
5.420 (37,400) 0.660 (4600) 0.224 (1500) 0.300
1.000 (6900) 1.000 (6900) 0.400 (2800) 0.250
Table A--5 Material Properties for Filament Wound Laminates

Model In L–t Coordinates, Combination S–7 (for Round Duct)

Theta (ν) Thickness
Lamina # Material #
degrees in. (mm)
0 Two 10 mil (0.25 mm)

C–Veils (or synthetic veils)
1 2 Chopped Liner or Mat 0.100 (2.54)
2 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
3 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
4 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
5 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
6 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
7 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
8 1 63 0.020 (0.51)
9 1 –63 0.020 (0.51)
Table A--6 Data for Each Lamina

(Theta (ν) Measured Clockwise from +Y Axis)
ASTM D638 ASTM ASTM D638 ASTM D2584

Duct Size Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Tensile Modulus Glass Content
psi (MPa) psi (MPa) psi (MPa) (% by weight)
20” x 20”
15.6 x 103 (108) 19.2 x 103 (132) 1.09 x 106 (7500) 36.1
(500 x 500 mm)
36” x 18”
16.2 x 103 (112) 22.4 x 103 (154) 1.12 x 106 (7700) 37.5
(900 x 450 mm)
36” x 72”
15.3 x 103 (105) 21.0 x 103 (145) 1.03 x 106 (7100) 36.4
(900 x 1800 mm)
72” x 72”
(1800 x 1800 14.4 x 103 (99) 20.9 x 103 (144) 0.96 x 106 (6600) 35.7
mm)
Table A--7 Average Material Properties for All Rectangular Ducts

A.6 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS A.2 Timoshenko, S. and Woinowsky–Krieger, S.,
Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw–Hill Books,
Second Edition, 1959.
A.3 Way, Stewart, “Uniformly Loaded, Clamped,

A.1 Baker, E.H., Kovalevsky, L. and Rish, F.L., Struc- Rectangular Plates with Large Deflection”, Proceed-
tural Analysis of Shells, Robert E. Krieger Publishing ings of the Fifth International Congress for Applied
Co., Malabar, Florida, 1981, Chapter 11 Mechanics, 1938, pages 123–128.


APPENDIX B
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF
FRP DUCT
APPENDIX B CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF FRP DUCT
B.1 INTRODUCTION While metallic corrosion testing is based on material

degradation as evidenced by surface attack, etching,
pitting, intergranular or galvanic attack, where materi-
The resistance of FRP composite laminates to aggres- al loss can be used to calculate a corrosion rate to pre-
sive corrosive environments is a primary reason for dict service life. Non–metallics are evaluated differ-
specifying FRP duct over other alternative materials. ently. Service life for non metallics is based on
FRP duct can be used to handle a wide range of chemi- strength retention, weight or volume change and visu-
cals, at varying elevated temperatures depending on al appearance. Case histories in any given environ-
the type of thermosetting resin selected. ment are the most reliable sources of information.
The FRP duct can be designed and fabricated to pro- Table B-1 is intended as a guide for selecting a suitable
vide for chemical resistance, flame retardance, surface resin for fume handling FRP duct applications. If the
conductivity, weathering, abrasion resistance and ex- application is severe or questionable, contact your res-
ternal chemical attack from spillage. in producer for resin recommendations. If the corro-
sive conditions are very severe, then chemical testing
may be necessary to determine a suitable thermoset-
Successful long term laminate performance requires ting resin to handle the application. In extreme cases,
selection of the correct thermosetting resin to handle consider a dual laminate, using a more corrosion re-
the chemical and temperature conditions, and also the sistant thermoplastic liner in place of the standard FRP
proper design, fabrication, and field installation of the corrosion barrier, with an FRP outer structural lami-
FRP duct system. nate for strength.
B.2 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

Note: Table B-1, Typical Chemical Resistance of Vari-
ous Resins Used in FRP Duct, is reprinted with permis-
The chemical resistance characteristics of FRP com- sion from the Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, 1992 Edi-
posite laminates are determined by corrosion testing in tion, courtesy of Fiberglass Pipe Institute of the SPI
accordance with ASTM C581 or by case histories of Composites Institute.
successful applications in the field.
Some corrodents listed in the original Fiberglass Pipe

ASTM C581 calls for corrosion test coupons duplicat- Handbook table have not been included in Table B-1
ing the corrosion barrier (VMMV), and resin rich sur- because they were not deemed relevant to fume and
faces on both sides and the cut edges sealed with cata- exhaust duct applications.
lyzed resin to prevent edge attack. These test laminates
are immersed in the corrodent for periods of 3, 6, and
12 months. The specimens are then removed, cleaned,
and sent for physical testing. Retention of physical In some applications, a “Corrosion Allowance” con-
strength, along with visual inspection for signs of at- sisting of one to two additional plies of 1–1/2 oz
tack, are the main criteria for the evaluation of FRP chopped strand mat is added to the corrosion barrier to
laminates for chemical service. combat permeation effects. The added thickness pro-
vides corrosion protection and maintains the structural
integrity of the FRP laminate.
The total immersion of FRP coupons in a chemical me-
dia is generally a more severe test than the vapor phase
corrosive conditions a duct system will actually exper- Note: The data in Table B–1 is listed for the following
ience. Therefore, published chemical resistance data temperatures: 120_F (49_C) and 210_F (99_C), and
for FRP is more favorable when applied to fume duct a max 180_F (82_C) for ISO resins, and 150_F (66_C)
in air handling applications. for ORTHO resins.
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition B.1

B.2
Bisphenol A Novolac Bisphenol A Chlorendic Isophthalic Orthophtalic

Vinyl Ester Vinyl Ester Fumarate Acid Polyester Acid Polyester Acid Polyester
Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Acetaldehyde N N R N N N N N N N N N
Acetic Acid, 20% R R R R R R R R R N N N
Acetone, 10% N N R N N N N N N N N N
Alcohol, allyl N N N N N N N N N N N N
Alcohol, benzyl N N C N N N N N N N N N
Alcohol, butyl (n–butanol) C N R N N N N N N N N N
Alcohol, butyl (2–butanol) C N R N N N N N N N N N

Alcohol, ethyl C N C N C N N N R N N N
Alcohol, hexyl C N R C N N N N N N N N
Alcohol, isopropyl (2–propanol) R N R N N N N N N N N N
Alcohol, methyl N N C N N N N N C N N N
Alcohol, propyl (1–propanol) C N R N N N N N N N N N
Allyl chloride N N N N N N N N N N N N
Ammonia, gas C N C N N N N N R N N N
Ammonia, liquid N N N N N N N N N N N N
Ammonium salts, except fluoride R R R R R R R C R R R R
Ammonium fluoride, 25% R N R N R N R N N N N N
Amyl acetate N N R N N N N N N N N N
Amyl chloride N N R N N N N N N N N N
Aniline N N N N N N N N N N N N
Aniline hydrochloride R N R N R N N N N N N N
Aqua regia N N ... ... R N R N N N N N
Aryl–sulfonic acid R R R R R R N N N N N N
Benzaldehyde, 10% N N ... ... N N N N N N N N
R = Generally resistant N = Generally not resistant C = Less resistant than R, but still suitable for some conditions ... = Not Rated
Copyright 1992, Fiberglass Pipe Institute of the SPI Composites Institute, Reprinted with Permission
Table B-- 1 Typical Chemical Resistance of Various Resins Used in FRP Duct
Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Benzene (benzoil) N N C N N N N N N N N N
Benzene sulfonic acid, 10% R R R R R C R C R N N N
Benzene sulfonic acid, 50% R N R N R R N N N N N N
Benzoic acid R R R R R R R R R N N N
Black liquor – paper R R R R R R N N N N N N
Bleach, 5.5% Active chlorine R N R N R N N N R N N N
Borax R R R R R R R N R N N N
Boric acid R R R N R ... R N R N N N
Brine R R R N R N R N R R R N
Bromic acid < 50% R N R N ... N ... N ... N ... N
Bromine, gas, 25% N N N N N N N N N N N N
Bromine, aq. R N R N ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Butane R R R R R R R R R R R R
Butantetrol (erythriol) R C R R R C R N R N N N
Butanediol N N R R N N N N N N N N
Butyl Acetate N N N N ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Butyl phenol N N N N N N N N N N N N
Butyric acid < 50% R R R R N N N N N N N N
Calcium salts, aq. R R R R R R R R R N N N
Calcium hypochlorite R N R N R N R N R N N N
Carbon disulfide N N N N N N N N N N N N
Carbon dioxide R R R R R R R R R N N N
Carbon dioxide, aq. R R R R R N R R R R R N
Carbon monoxide R R R R R R R R R R R R
Table B--1 Typical Chemical Resistance of Various Resins Used in FRP Duct (continued)
B.3
B.4

Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Carbon tetrachloride R N R N N N R N N N N N
Caustic potash (KOH) R N R N R N N N N N N N
Caustic soda (NaOH) R N R N R N N N N N N N
Chlorine, gas, dry R R R R R N R N R N N N
Chlorine, gas, wet R R R R R N R R N N N N
Chlorine, water R N R R C N C N N N N N
Chlorocetic acid R N R N N N N N N N N N
Chlorobenzene N N C N N N N N N N N N
Chloroform N N N N N N N N N N N N
Chlorosulfonic acid, 10% N N N N N N N N N N N N
Chromic acid, 10% R N R N ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Chromic acid, 30% N N N N N N R N N N N N
Citric acid R R R R R R R R R N N N
Copper salts, aq. R R R R R R R R R R N N
Cresylic acid, 50% N N N N N N N N N N N N
Crude oil R R R R R N R R N N R N
Cyclohexane R N R N N N R N R R N N
Cyclohexanol R N R N R N R N R N N N
Cyclohexanone N N ... ... N N N N N N N N
Diesel fuels R N R R R N R N R N C N
Diethyl amine N N N N N N N N N N N N
Dioxane–1,4 N N ... ... N N N N N N N N
Dimethylamine N N N N N N N N N N N N
Dimethyl formamide N N N N N N N N N N N N
Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Dibutyl sebacate R N R N R R R R R R N N
Dichlorobenzene N N R N N N N N N N N N
Dichlorethylene N N N N N N N N N N N N
Ether (diethyl) N N N N N N N N N N N N
Ethyl halides N N N N N N N N N N N N
Ethylene halides N N N N N N N N N N N N
Ethylene glycol R R R R R R R R R R N N
Ethylene oxide N N N N N N N N N N N N
Fatty acids R R R R R R R R R R N N
Ferric salts R R R R R R R R R R N N
Fluorine, gas, dry N N N N N N N N N N N N
Fluorine, gas, wet N N N N N N N N N N N N
Fluoroboric acid, 25% R R R R N N N N N N N N
Fluorosilicic acid, 10% R N R N N N N N N N N N
Formaldehyde R N R N N N R N R N N N
Formic acid N N C N N N N N N N N N
Freon N N N N N N N N N N N N
Fuel oil R N R R N N R N R N R N
Furfural N N N N N N N N N N N N
Gas, natural, methane R N R N R N R N R N N N
Gasoline C N R C C N C N R N N N
Glycerine (glycerol) R R R R R N R N R N N N
Glycols R R R R R R R R R R N N
Glycolic acid C N C N R N R N R N N N
B.5
B.6

Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Green Liquor – paper R N R N R N N N N N N N
Heptane R R R R R N R N R N N N
Hexane R N R N R N R N R N N N
Hydrobromic acid, 25% R N R N R N R N R N N N
Hydrochloric acid R R R R R R R R R N N N
Hydrofluoric acid, 10% R N R N N N N N C N N N
Hydrocyanic acid R N R R R N R N N N N N
Hydrogen peroxide, 50% N N ... ... N N N N N N N N
Hydrogen sulfide, dry R R R R R N R R R N N N
Hydrazine N N N N N N N N N N N N
Hypochlorous acid, 10% N N R C N N N N N N N N
Jet fuels, JP 4 AND JP 5 R N R N N N R N R N N N
Kerosene R N R N R N R N R N N N
Lactic acid, 25% R R R R R R R N R N N N
Lauric acid R R R R R R R R R N N N
Lauryl chloride R R R R ... ... R R R N N N
Lauryl sulfate R R R R R R R R R N N N
Lead salts R R R R R R R R R R N N
Linoleic acid R N R R R N R N R N N N
Linseed oil R R R R R N R R R N N N
Lubricating oils R N R N R N R N R N N N
Machine oil R N R N R N R N R N N N
Magnesium salts R R R R R R R R R R N N
Maleic acid R N R R R N R N R N N N
Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Manganese sulfate R R R R R N R N R N N N
Mercuric salts R R R R R R R R R N N N
Methane R R R R R R R R R R R R
Methyl acetate N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methyl bromide (gas) N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methyl cellosolve N N ... ... N N N N N N N N
Methyl chloride N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methyl chloroform N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methyl cyclohexanone N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methyl methacrylate N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methylene bromide N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methylene chloride N N N N N N N N N N N N
Methylene iodide N N N N N N N N N N N N
Mineral oil R R R R R N R N R N N N
Monochlorobenzene N N C N N N N N N N N N
Monoethanolamine N N N N N N N N N N N N
Motor oil R R R R R R R R R R N N
Naphtha R N R R R N R N R N N N
Naphthalene R R R R R N N N R N N N
Nickel salts R R R R R R R R R R N N
Nitric acid, 0 to 20% R N R N N N R N N N N N
Nitric acid, fuming N N N N N N N N N N N N
Nitrobenzene N N C N N N N N N N N N
Nitrous acid R N R N N N R N R N N N
B.7
B.8

Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Oleic acid R R R R R N R N R R N N
Oleum N N N N N N N N N N N N
Oxalic acid R R ... R R R R R R R N N
Ozone, gas, 5% R N R N N N N N N N N N
Palmitic acid, 10% R R R R R R R R R R N N
Palmitic acid, 70% R R R R R R R R R R N N
Paraffin R R R R R R R R R R R R
Pentane R N R N R N R N R N N N
Perchloric acid, 10% R N R N N N N N N N N N
Perchloroethylene N N R N N N N N N N N N
Petroleum, sour R R R R R N R R R N N N
Petroleum, refined R R R R R N R R R N R N
Phenylcarbinol N N N N N N N N N N N N
Phenylhydrazine N N N N N N N N N N N N
Phosphoric acid R R R R R R R R R C N N
Phosphorous, yellow N N N N N N N N N N N N
Phosphorous, red N N N N N N N N N N N N
Phosphorous trichloride N N N N N N N N N N N N
Phthalic acid R R R R R R R R ... ... ... ...
Potassium salts, aq. R R R R R R R R R R N N
Potassium permanganate, 75% R R R R R N R N R N N N
Propane R R R R R R R R R R R R
Propylene dichloride N N N N N N N N N N N N
Propylene glycol R R R R R N R N R N N N
Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Propylene oxide N N N N N N N N N N N N
Pyridine N N N N N N N N N N N N
Rayon coagulating bath R N R N R N R N ... ... N N
Sea water R R R R R N R N R R R N
Salicylic acid R N R N R N R N R N N N
Sewage, residential C N R C N N C N R N C N
Silicic acid R R R R R R R R R N N N
Silver salts R R R R R N R R R R N N
Soaps R R R R R R R R R R R N
Sodium hydroxide C N ... ... ... ... ... ... N N ... ...
Sodium chlorite, 10% R N R N ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Sodium chlorate R R R R ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Sodium dichromate, acid R R R R ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Stannic chloride R R R R R N R N R N N N
Stannous chloride R R R R R R R R R R N N
Stearic acid R R R R R R R R R R N N
Sulfite liquor R R R R R N R N R N N N
Sulfur R N R R R N R N R N N N
Sugars, aq. R R R R R R R R R N
Sulfur dioxide, dry R R R R R R R R R R N N
Sulfur dioxide, wet R R R R R R R R R R N N
Sulfur trioxide, gas, dry R R R R N N ... ... N N ... ...
Sulfur trioxide, wet N N N N N N N N N N N N
Sulfuric acid < 26% R R R R R N R N R N N N
B.9
B.10

Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Sulfurous acid, 26 to 80% R N R N N N R N N N N N
Tannic acid R R R R R R R R R R N N
Tartaric acid R R R R R R R R R R N N
Tetrachloroethane N N R N N N N N N N N N
Tetrahydrofuran N N N N N N N N N N N N
Thionyl chloride N N N N N N N N N N N N
Terpineol R R R R R R R R R R N N
Toluene N N R N N N N N N N N N
Tributyl phosphate R N R N N N N N N N N N
Trichloracetic acid R R R R R N N N N N N N
Trichloroethylene N N N N N N N N N N N N
Triethanolamine R N R N ... ... ... ... N N N N
Triethylamine R N R N ... ... ... ... N N N N
Turpentine R N R R N N R N N N N N
Urea, 50% R N R N R N R N R N N N
Urine R N R N R N R N R N N N
Vegetable oils R R R R R R R R R R R N
Vinegar R R R R R N R R R N N N
Vinyl acetate N N N N N N N N N N N N
Water, distilled R N R R R N R N R N N N
Water, fresh R R R R R N R N R R R N
Water, mine R R R R R N R N R N N N
Water, salt R R R N R N R N R R R N
Water, tap R N R R R N R N R R R N
Polyester
Temperature _F 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 210 120 180 120 150
Whiskey R N R N N N N N R N N N
Wines R N R N N N N N R N N N
Xylene N N R N N N N N N N N N
Zine salts R R R R R R R R R R N N
B.11
B.12 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

APPENDIX C
ALTERNATE ROUND DUCT

DESIGN TABLES
APPENDIX C ALTERNATE ROUND DUCT DESIGN TABLES
C.1 INTRODUCTION a. the safety factor for each combination of lam-

inate thickness and diameter is equal to or
greater than 5.0, and
Based on the research done in preparation for this
manual, it became clear that the quality of currently b. the distance between supports is a maximum
produced FRP laminates is consistently producing a of 10 ft (3050 mm).
material with proven physical characteristics and ac-
ceptably uniform thickness. For this reason the FRP
Task Force decided to create design tables for round Typically, before selecting the required laminate
FRP duct based on a safety factor of 4.0 (See Chapter thickness for a particular application, the system de-
5) and not the traditional 5.0. sign pressure (positive or negative), the duct diameter,
and the laminate type are known.
Conscious that a number of organizations and individ-

uals may insist on requesting round duct systems de- C.2.1.1 Required Laminate Thickness
signed to the higher safety factor, the FRP Task Force
opted for including a set of tables based on a safety fac-
To select the required laminate thickness, first deter-
tor of 5.0 in this Appendix.
pressure is positive, go to section 5.1.4. If the system
This Appendix contains only the tables necessary for design pressure is negative, use either Table C-1 or
the selection of a duct wall laminate; for all other de- C-1M to complete the following steps:
sign needs, refer to the appropriate chapters in the
main body of the manual. a. Find the smallest diameter listing that equals
consideration.
C.2 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT USING
TYPES I AND II LAMINATES (5.0 SAFE-
TY FACTOR) b. Move horizontally within the range of the ap-
propriate laminate type and find the mini-
mum pressure rating that equals or exceeds
C.2.1 Design for Negative Pressure the system design pressure.
(Vacuum)
c. Move vertically to the header of the column
and identify the corresponding nominal lami-
For the practical application of the tables in this sec- nate thickness.
tion, it suffices to say that Tables C-1 and C-1M list the
for Types I and II laminates. C.2.1.2 Laminate Construction and Minimum
To complete the selection of the basic construction re-

Note: For a detailed discussion of the development of
quirements for FRP ducts, two additional pieces of in-
the design tables contained in this manual, the as-
formation must be identified:
results, see Appendix A. a. Laminate Reinforcement Sequence – From
Table 5-1 or 5-2, select the appropriate rein-
forcement sequence for the required laminate
The data in Tables C-1 and C-1M is arranged with the thickness previously selected from Table C-1
nominal laminate thickness heading the columns and or C-1M.
a series of duct diameters listed vertically, starting
with the smallest at 4 in. (100 mm) to the largest at 72
in. (1800 mm). b. Minimum Required Mechanical Properties –
From Table 5-3, identify the minimum lami-
nate properties required to meet the design
These tables are based on two important assumptions: ratings of Tables C-1 and C-1M.
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition C.1

10 ft Min. Safety Factor of 5.0
C.2
Support Span Round Duct

Modulus of
Elasticity (E), 1.0 x 106 1.3 x 106 1.4 x 106 1.5 x 106 1.5 x 106 1.5 x 106
psi
Thickness in. 0.139 0.182 0.225 0.268 0.311 0.354 0.397 0.440 0.483 0.526 0.215 0.291 0.367 0.410 0.486
Diameter, in.
4 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
6 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
8 27.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
10 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
12 15.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
14 10.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
16 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
18 7.5 17.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30.0 ... ... ... ...
20 5.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 27.5 30.0 ... ... ...
24 5.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 22.5 30.0 ... ... ...
28 NR 7.5 15.0 22.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... 17.5 30.0 ... ... ...
30 NR 7.5 12.5 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... 15.0 30.0 ... ... ...
32 NR 5.0 12.5 20.0 27.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... 12.5 30.0 ... ... ...
36 NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 22.5 30.0 ... ... ... ... 10.0 27.5 30.0 ... ...
42 NR NR 7.5 12.5 20.0 27.5 30.0 ... ... ... 7.5 22.5 30.0 ... ...
48 NR NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 22.5 30.0 ... ... ... 7.5 17.5 30.0 ... ...
54 NR NR 5.0 7.5 12.5 17.5 25.0 30.0 ... ... 5.0 15.0 30.0 ... ...
60 NR NR NR 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 27.5 30.0 ... 5.0 12.5 25.0 30.0 ...
66 NR NR NR 5.0 10.0 12.5 17.5 22.5 30.0 ... NR 10.0 22.5 30.0 ...
72 NR NR NR 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 NR 10.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Table C--1 Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in in. wg
NOTES:
b. Cells marked ... represent diameter and laminate combinations beyond the scope of this manual. They are more than adequate at the maximum rating of 30 in. (7500Pa) wg but
become economically less attractive with increasing thickness.
Modulus of
Elasticity (E), 6.9 x 106 9.0 x 106 9.7 x 106 10.3 x 106 10.3 x 106 10.3 x 106
kPa
Thickness, mm 3.53 4.62 5.72 6.81 7.90 8.99 10.08 11.18 12.27 13.36 5.46 7.39 9.32 10.41 12.34
Diameter, mm
100 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
125 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
150 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
200 6850 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
250 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
300 3750 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
350 2500 6200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
400 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
450 1870 4350 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7500 ... ... ... ...
500 1250 3750 6200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... 6850 7500 ... ... ...
600 1250 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... 5600 7500 ... ... ...
700 NR 1870 3750 5600 7500 ... ... ... ... ... 4350 7500 ... ... ...
750 NR 1870 3100 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... 3750 7500 ... ... ...
800 NR 1250 3100 5000 6850 7500 ... ... ... ... 3100 7500 ... ... ...
900 NR 1250 2500 3750 5600 7500 ... ... ... ... 2500 6850 7500 ... ...
1050 NR NR 1870 3100 5000 6850 7500 ... ... ... 1870 5600 7500 ... ...
1200 NR NR 1250 2500 3750 5600 7500 ... ... ... 1870 4350 7500 ... ...
1350 NR NR 1250 1870 3100 4350 6200 7500 ... ... 1250 3750 7500 ... ...
1500 NR NR NR 1870 2500 3750 5000 6850 7500 ... 1250 3100 6200 7500 ...
1650 NR NR NR 1250 2500 3100 4350 5600 7500 ... NR 2500 5600 7500 ...
1800 NR NR NR 1250 1870 2500 3750 5000 6200 7500 NR 2500 5000 6200 7500
Table C-- 1M Negative Pressure Ratings of Types I & II Laminates in Pa
NOTES:
b. Cells marked ... represent diameter and laminate combinations beyond the scope of this manual. They are more than adequate at the maximum rating of 30 in. (7500 Pa) wg but
become economically less attractive with increasing thickness.
C.3
C.4 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

C.3 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT USING C.3.1.1 Required Laminate Thickness
FILAMENT WOUND (TYPE X) LAMI-
NATES (5.0 SAFETY FACTOR)
To select the required laminate thickness, first deter-
C.3.1 Design for Negative Pressure pressure is positive, go to section 5.2.4. If the system
(Vacuum) design pressure is negative, use either Table C-2 or
C-2M to complete the following steps:
For the practical application of the tables in this sec-

tion, it suffices to say that Tables 5-9 and 5-9M list the a. Find the smallest diameter listing that equals
consideration.
for Filament Wound (Type X) laminates.
b. Move horizontally and find the minimum

Note: For a detailed discussion of the development of pressure rating that equals or exceeds the sys-
the design tables contained in this manual, the as- tem design pressure.
results, see Appendix A. c. Move vertically to the header of the column
and identify the corresponding laminate
combination.
The data in Tables C-2 and C-2M is arranged with the
Filament Wound (Type X) laminate combination (S1
through S13) heading the columns and a series of duct C.3.1.2 Laminate Construction and Minimum
diameters listed vertically, starting with the smallest at Required Mechanical Properties
4 in. (100 mm) to the largest at 72 in. (1800 mm).
To complete the selection of the basic construction re-

The tables are based on two important assumptions: quirements for FRP ducts fabricated from Filament
Wound (Type X) laminates and operating under a neg-
ative design pressure, two more pieces of information
must be identified:
a. the safety factor for each combination of lam-
inate thickness and diameter is equal to or
greater than 5.0, and
a. Composite Laminate Structure – From Table
5-6, select the appropriate composite lami-
nate structure corresponding to the laminate
b. the distance between supports is a maximum combination previously selected from Table
of 10 ft (3050 mm). C-2 or C-2M.
Typically, before selecting the required laminate b. Minimum Required Mechanical Properties –
thickness for a particular application, the system de- From Table 5-7, identify the minimum lami-
sign pressure (positive or negative), the duct diameter, nate mechanical properties required to meet
and the laminate type are known. the design ratings of Tables C-2 and C-2M.
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition C.5

10 ft Min. Safety Factor of 5.0
C.6
Support Span Round Duct

LAMINATES S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15
Diameter, in.
4 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
5 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
6 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
8 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
10 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
12 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
14 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
16 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...

18 15.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
20 10.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ...
24 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ... ...
28 5.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ...
30 5.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ... ...
32 5.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ... ...
36 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ... ...
42 NR 5.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 ... ... ...
48 NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 30.0 ... ...
54 NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 ... ...
60 NR 5.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 ...
66 NR NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 ...
72 NR NR 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Table C--2 Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in in. wg
NOTES:
b. Cells marked ... represent diameter and laminate combinations beyond the scope of this manual. They are more than adequate at the maximum rating of
30 in. (7500 Pa) wg but become economically less attractive with increasing thickness.
c. To select filament wound laminates for Positive pressure systems see section 5.2.4.
LAMINATES S1 S3 S5 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15
Diameter, mm
100 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
125 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

150 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
200 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
250 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
300 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
350 6250 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
400 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
450 3750 7500 ... ... ... ... ... ...
500 2500 6250 7500 ... ... ... ... ...
600 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ... ...
700 1250 3750 6250 7500 ... ... ... ...
750 1250 3750 6250 7500 ... ... ... ...
800 1250 2500 5000 7500 ... ... ... ...
900 1250 2500 3750 6250 7500 ... ... ...
1050 NR 1250 3750 5000 7500 ... ... ...
1200 NR 1250 2500 3750 6250 7500 ... ...
1350 NR 1250 2500 3750 5000 7500 ... ...
1500 NR 1250 1250 2500 5000 6250 7500 ...
1650 NR NR 1250 2500 3750 5000 7500 ...
1800 NR NR 1250 2500 3750 5000 6250 7500
Table C–2M Negative Pressure Ratings of Filament Wound (Type X) Laminates in Pa
NOTES:
b. Cells marked ... represent diameter and laminate combinations beyond the scope of this manual. They are more than adequate at the maximum rating of
30 in.(7500 Pa) wg but become economically less attractive with increasing thickness.
C.7
c. To select filament wound laminates for Positive pressure systems see section 5.2.4.
C.8 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

APPENDIX D
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX D GLOSSARY
Glossary is reprinted with permission from ASME RTP–1–1995, courtesy of the American Society of Mechanical En-
gineers.
–A– –C–
“C” glass – a borosilicate glass fiber used to produce

accelerator – a material added to the resin to increase
a very light fabric known as surfacing veil.
the rate of polymerization (curing).
catalyst – an organic peroxide material used to activate

axial – in the direction of the axis (lengthwise center- the polymerization reaction of a resin, causing it to
line) of the equipment. harden (polymerization initiator).
chopped strand mat – reinforcement made from ran-

–B–
domly oriented glass strands that are held together in
mat form using binder. Each strand has a sizing.
Barcol hardness test – test to determine the degree of

cure by measuring resin hardness. The Barcol Impres- chopper gun – a machine that is used to cut continuous
sor is the instrument used for measuring polyester and fiberglass roving to predetermined lengths (usually
vinyl ester resin hardness (ASTM D2583). 1/2 to 2 in. (12 to 50 mm) and propel the cut strands to
the mold surface. In the spray–up process, a catalyzed
resin spray is deposited simultaneously on the mold.
binder – chemical treatment applied to the random ar- When intersperse layers are provided in filament
rangement of glass fibers to give integrity to mats. winding, the resin spray is often not used.
Specific binders are utilized to promote chemical
compatibility with the various laminating resins used.
classification of laminates – for contact molded and
for filament wound.
blister – raised spot on the surface of a laminate caused

by a subsurface air void. contact molding – process for molding FRP in which
reinforcement and resin are placed in or on a mold.
Cure is with out the application of pressure on the ma-
terials, either at room temperature using a catalyst–
bonding – joining of two or more parts by adhesive
promoter system or by heat in an oven. Includes both
forces.
hand lay–up and spray–up.
bond strength – force per unit area (psi) necessary to corrosion layer (barrier) – critical segment of the lami-
rupture a bond in interlaminar shear. nate consisting of a resin rich inner surface, followed by
an interior layer consisting of two plies of chopped strand
mat. (See section 3.3.)
burned areas – areas of laminate showing evidence of
decomposition (e.g., discoloration or cracking) due to
coverage – in hoop filament winding, the complete
excessive resin exotherm.
covering of the mandrel surface by a single layer of
glass reinforcement and resin. In helical winding, two
layers must be applied to achieve one coverage.
burn out (burn off) – thermal decomposition of organ-
ic materials (resins and binders) from a laminate speci-
men in order to determine the weight percent of resin crazing – the formation of tiny hairline cracks in vary-
and glass reinforcement (synthetic reinforcement de- ing degrees throughout the resin matrix, particularly in
compose together with the resin and binder). resin–rich areas.
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition D.1

curing agents – materials used to initiate the polymer- used, however, to designate the maximum temperature
ization of a resin. The catalyst is the primary agent. reached during the polymerization process.
Promoters and accelerators are secondary or assisting
agents.
exotherm ply – that ply of chopped strand mat at which
the lamination process is stopped to allow gelation and
cut edge – end of a laminate resulting from cutting that exotherm of the existing laminate.
is not protected by a corrosion barrier.
exterior layer – outer surface layer of a laminate. (See

cylindrical – See round (cylindrical) duct. section 3.5.)
–F–
–D–
fiber(glass) – a fine solid thread of glass.

delamination – physical separation or loss of bond be-
tween laminate plies.
fiberglass roving – a number of strands or filaments of
glass fibers gathered together with little or no twist.
design laminate – either a standard laminate whose
physical characteristics are well documented (See
Tables 5-3 and 5-7) or alternately, a laminate whose fiberglass woven roving – heavy fabric woven from
physical characteristics are substantiated through test- glass fiber rovings.
ing. In either case, it is the laminate whose construc-
tion sequence will be duplicated in the fabrication of
the duct. fiber wetting – coating (wetting) of the fiberglass with
resin by means of roll–out or immersion
dry spot – an area where the reinforcement fibers have

not been sufficiently wetted with resin. filament – See fiber.
–E– filament winding – a process for forming FRP parts by

winding either dry or resin saturated continuous roving
strands onto a rotating mandrel.
edge sealing – application of reinforcement and resin,
or resin alone, to seal cut edges and provide a corrosion
fillers – inert materials that are added to the resin to in-
resistant barrier. The final layer of resin shall be paraf-
crease density, increase viscosity, improve abrasion
finated.
resistance, enhance resin application properties, de-
crease resin shrinkage, reduce cost, etc.
entrapped air void – cavity in a laminate caused by a
trapped gas bubble. fill picks – the rovings in a woven roving that run in the
transverse direction of the fabric, i.e., across the roll
width of the fabric.
environment – state of the surroundings in contact
with the internal or external surface. Included are the
temperature, pressure, chemical exposure to sunlight, fit–up – the match between joining parts, elements, or
relative humidity, liquids, or gases. components.
exotherm – evolution of heat by the resin during the flame retardant resin – halogenated resins that can be
polymerization reaction. The word exotherm is often used with or without additives to provide a laminate
D.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

having reduced flame spread as measured in accor- gel – the initial jellylike solid phase that develops dur-
dance with NFPA 255, Standard Method of Surface ing the polymerization of resin.
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
(UL723, ASTM E84). The resins are not fire retardant
in their liquid state. gel time – time form the initial mixing of the resin with
catalyst to when gelation begins.
flame spread rating – index number resulting from

glass content – weight percent of glass fiber reinforce-
testing in accordance with NFPA 225, Standard Meth-
ment in the laminate.
od of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Ma-
terials (UL723, ASTM E84).
gun roving – fiberglass roving designed for use in a
chopper gun for spray–up application.
flange cant – the angle that an entire branch is off from
being perpendicular to the main run centerline. (See
Figure 7-2.) –H–
flange flatness – maximum deviation from the actual hand lay–up – a method of contact molding wherein
flange face, excluding warpage or perpendicularity. the glass fiber reinforcement is applied to the mold, in
(See Figure 7-3.) the form of chopped strand mat or woven roving, by
hand or form a reel. The resin matrix is applied by vari-
ous methods including brush, roller, or spray gun. Con-
solidation of the composite laminate is by rolling.
flange offset – the amount that an entire branch is off-
set with respect to the main run centerline. (See Figure
7-4.) heat deflection temperature – temperature at which a
specified bar specimen deflects 0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
when loaded as a simple beam to a constant 264 psi
flange perpendicularity – maximum angle that the (see ASTM D648, Test Method for Deflection Tem-
plane of the flange inside diameter makes with the perature of Plastics Under Flexural Load). Usually re-
plane perpendicular to the duct’s centerline. (See Fig- fers to a resin casting, not laminate.
ure 7-2.)
helical winding – filament winding where the rein-

flange warpage – the amount that a flange outside di- forcement is placed at some angle (other than 0° or
ameter pulls back from the plane of the inside diameter 90°) to the axis of rotation.
during the cure of the composite laminate. (See Figure
7-3.)
hot cure – process of increasing the amount of catalyst
to expedite the cure.
fabricator – producer of FRP equipment. The fabrica-

tor combines resin and reinforcing fibers to produce hot patch – several small fiberglass mat tabs, saturated
the final product. with highly catalyzed resin, used to hold butted or joined
parts or components in preparation for bonding.
FRP – Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.

hydrostatic test – pressure test of equipment using wa-
ter as the test medium.
–G–
–I–
gap filling – the filling of voids between joined parts,

elements, or components with resin putty. initiator – See catalyst.

inner surface – resin rich, corrosion resistant surface lamination analysis – procedure by which, given the
of the corrosion barrier. (See section 3.3.1.) amount and properties of the resin and the properties
and orientation of the reinforcement, it is possible to
calculate the elastic properties of the individual layers
interior layer – fiber reinforced layer of the corrosion and the total laminate.
barrier. (See section 3.3.2.)
layout – the arrangement and location of parts, ele-
ments, or components that reflect the design of a prod-
intersperse – chopped fiberglass used in a filament uct.
wound laminate, usually in thin layers between wind-
ing coverages.
leno strands – a pair of warp ends at each edge of a wo-
ven fiberglass fabric.
intumescent coating – a coating that when subjected
to heat in excess of 300°F (149°C) swells and chars
forming an insulating, fire retardant barrier. liner – (See corrosion layer (barrier.)
longitudinal – See axial.

isophthalic polyester – a polyester made from
isophthalic acid.
–M–
–J–
mandrel – mold around which a laminate is formed to
fabricate a round section.
joint overlay – an overlay laminate that joins the ad-
joining surfaces of two contacting parts or elements.
Manufacturers – producers of materials of construc-
tion, e.g., resin reinforcement fibers, catalysts, com-
mon additives, etc.
–L–
manway – large nozzle or opening in a vessel for the

laminate – the total of the part constructed by combin- purpose of entry by personnel.
ing one or more layers of material (reinforcement and/
or resin). As used in this Standard, the corrosion lami-
nate consists of the corrosion resistant barrier, the materials – ingredients (reinforcement, resins, cata-
structural layer, and the outer surface. lysts, and common additives) that are used to fabricate
the equipment
laminate composition – the sequence of reinforce-

ment materials on a type, class, and category basis that matrix – resin phase of a fiberglass resin composite.
make up a laminate.
mold – the form over which or into which resin and re-
inforcements are placed to form the composite product
laminate element – a part of the structural layer of a shape.
filament wound laminate that is described by the wind
angle, number of coverages with supplementary rein-
forcement (if used), and the required sequence. mold release agents – See parting agents.
laminate structure – (Type I, Type II, hand lay–up, and monomer – a basic compound styrene that can react
filament wound (Type X)) – (See section 3.4.) with itself to form a polymer.

–O– –Q–
quality assurance – the system by which the Fabrica-

overlay – laminates used over base FRP structures to tor provides evidence that the quality control system
secure a joint, seal a seam, attach a nozzle, etc. has been followed in the construction of the product.
quality control – the system a Fabricator uses to fabri-

–P– cate the equipment in compliance with this Manual.
–R–
paraffinated resin – resin containing a small amount
of dissolved paraffin (usually 0.1% to 0.5%). Polymer-
ization of polyesters is inhibited by contact with the at- rectangular duct – a conduit having a rectangular
mosphere. During cure, the paraffin migrates to the cross-section and used for moving air, alone or in com-
surface, sealing it against atmosphere exposure. bination with other gases, vapors, or particulate mat-
ter.
parting agents – also called mold release agents. Com- referee samples – laminate specimens submitted to es-
pounds that assist in releasing an FRP part from its tablish a level of quality for judging acceptance or re-
mold. jection of production equipment.
reinforcement – glass fibers having the form of

pit – small crater in the surface of the laminate.
chopped roving, continuous roving, fabric, or chopped
strand mat. These fibers are added to the resin matrix
to strengthen and improve the properties of the resin.
polyester resin – resin produced by the polycondensa-
tion of dihydroxy derivatives and dibasic organic acids
release film – film used to facilitate removal of the part
or anhydrides, wherein at least one component con-
from the mold or mandrel. Oriented polyester film, 3
tributes ethylene unsaturation yielding resins that can
to 5mil (MYLAR , Types A, S, or D; or MELINEX
be compounded with styryl monomers and reacted to
11 , Types A, O, or 442), has been found suitable for
give highly cross–linked thermoset resins.
this purpose.
post–curing – process of applying heat (180 to 200_F resin – the matrix of the laminate.
(82 to 93_C)) to an FRP part, following the exotherm
cycle. Proper post curing will shorten the time to total
cure. resin putty – resin filled with clay, fumed silica, milled
glass fibers, or other inert materials to provide putty-
like consistency.
profile – the roughness (smoothness) of the surface.

resin rich layer – term often used to describe the corro-
sion barrier. The term does not imply excessive resin
content.
promoter – a material that activates the catalyst which
cures the resin. (See accelerator.)
resin richness – excessive amounts or uneven distribu-
tion of resin in the laminate. Such areas are subject to
cracking. Resin richness is the result of improper wet–
PVA – abbreviation for polyvinyl alcohol, a parting out procedures as well as inadequate or improper roll–
agent. out techniques or drainage.

roll–out – densification of the laminate by working re- structural layer – the portion of the construction pro-
inforcement into the resin and the air out of the resin viding the primary mechanical strength.
using a roller (a serrated metal or thermoplastic roller
is often used for this purpose).
surface preparation – the act of roughening, priming,
or otherwise treating laminate surfaces to achieve sur-
face conditions that conductive to adhesion of subse-
rough profile – the result of sanding, machining, or
quently applied laminate bonds.
otherwise abrading a laminate surface to produce a
roughened surface for bonding.
surfacing veil (mat) – thin mat, of fiberglass, synthetic
organic fiber, or carbon fiber, that is used to reinforce
round (cylindrical) duct – a cylindrical shaped con- the corrosion resistant resin rich layer on the inside or
duit for moving air, alone or in combination with other outside of equipment.
gases, vapors, or particulate matter.
–T–
roving – a plurality of strands or filaments gathered to-
gether with little or no twist in a package known as a
Tex – linear density of roving expressed in grams per
roving ball.
1000 m.
RTP – Reinforced Thermoset Plastic (also see FRP). –U–
–S– unidirectional rovings – continuous parallel roving

strands of glass fiber held together with periodic cross
strands.
safety solvent – a non–flammable, non–acetone based
solvent used for various clean–activities in the FRP User – organization for which the equipment is being
fabrication process. fabricated.
secondary bond strength – adhesive force that holds UV absorber – compounds that are added to resins to
a separately cured laminate to the basic substrate lami- enhance their ultraviolet resistance.
nate.
–V–
sizing – surface treatment or coating applied to fila-
ment to improve the filament–to–resin bond. veil – See surfacing veil.
spray–up – method of contact molding wherein resin vinyl ester resin – resin characterized by reactive un-
and chopped strands of continuous filament glass fiber saturation located predominately in terminal positions
roving are deposited on the mold directly from a chop- which can be compounded with styryl monomers and
per gun. reacted to give highly cross–linked thermoset copo-
lymers. (See section 2.2.4.)
strain – elongation per unit strength. voids – unfilled space caused by air or gas in the resin
mix or by entrapment of such gases during lay–up of
individual plies of glass. Excessive voids reduce the
strand – a plurality of filaments gathered together and strength and chemical resistance of the laminate, par-
bonded with sizing. ticularly if the voids are at the resin–glass interface.

–W– wind cycle – in filament winding, one traversing of the
carriage to the end of the mandrel and return to the
original position. Depending on band width, part di-
ameter, and wind angle, one or more wind cycles will
warp ends – the roving in a woven roving which runs
be needed to achieve one coverage.
in the longitudinal direction of the fabric, i.e., along
the roll length of the fabric.
–Y–
wind angle – angle from the axis of rotation at which

the reinforcement strands are placed in the filament yield – linear density of roving, expressed in yards per
winding process. pound.


APPENDIX E
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
APPENDIX E REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
E.1 ASTM S ASTM Standard D3982–92, Contact Molded

“Fiberglass” (Glass Fiber Reinforced Ther-
mosetting Resin) Duct and Hoods. ibid. 1992.
The following ASTM documents are available from:
S ASTM Standard E84–96a, Surface Burning
ASTM
Characteristics of Building Materials. ibid.
100 Barr Harbor Drive
1996.
West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959
Phone: 610–832–9585
Fax: 610–832–9555 S ASTM Standard E662–95, Specific Optical
Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materi-
als. ibid. 1995.
S ASTM Standard C581–94, Determining
Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Res-
ins Used in Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Struc- E.2 NFPA STANDARDS
tures Intended for Liquid Service. American
Society for Testing and Materials, West Con- The following NFPA document is available from:
shohocken, PA. 1994.
National Fire Protection Association
11 Tracy Drive
S ASTM Standard C582–95, Contact–Molded Avon, MA 02322–9908
Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Phone: 800–344–3555
Laminates for Corrosion–Resistant Equip- Fax: 800–593–NFPA
ment. ibid. 1995.
S ANSI/NFPA 91, Standard for Exhaust Sys-
tems for Air Conveying of Materials. Nation-
S ASTM Standard D638–96, Standard Test al Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA.
Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 1995.
ibid. 1992.
E.3 ASME STANDARDS

S ASTM Standard D790–96a, Flexural Prop-
erties of Unreinforced Plastics and Electrical The following ASME document is available from:
Insulating Materials. ibid. 1996.
ASME
Order Department
S ASTM Standard D883–96, Standard Ter- 22 Law Drive
minology Relating to Plastics. ibid. 1996. P.O. Box 2300
Fairhill, NJ 07007–2300
Phone: 800–843–2763
Fax: 973–882–1717
S ASTM Standard D2563–94, Classifying
Visual Defects in Glass–Reinforced Plastic
Laminate Parts. ibid. 1994 S ANSI/ASME RTP–1–1995 Edition, Rein-
forced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resist-
ant Equipment. American Society of Me-
S ASTM Standard D2583–95, Indentation chanical Engineers, New York, NY. 1995.
Hardness of Rigid PLASTICS by Means of a
BARCOL Impressor. ibid. 1995.
E.4 SMACNA STANDARDS
S ASTM Standard D2584–94, Ignition Loss of The following SMACNA documents are available
Cured Reinforced Resins. ibid. 1994. from:
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition E.1

SMACNA Manual of Recommended Practice. Ameri-
Publications Department can Conference of Governmental Industrial
4201 Lafayette Center Drive Hygienists, Cincinnati, OH. 1995.
Chantilly, VA 20151–1209
Phone: 703–803–2980
Fax: 703–803–3732 The following AMCA documents are available from:
Air Movement and Control Association Inc.

S SMACNA. Architectural Sheet Metal Manu-
30 W. University Drive
al. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Con-
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
tractors’ National Association, Inc., Chantil-
Phone: 847–394–0150
ly, VA. 1993.
Fax: 847–253–0088
S SMACNA. HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting

and Balancing. ibid. 1993. S AMCA Publication 99. Standards for Air
Moving Devices. Air Movement and Control
Association Inc., Arlington Heights, IL.
S SMACNA. HVAC Systems Duct Design. ibid. 1986.
1993.
S AMCA Standard 210. Laboratory Methods

S SMACNA. Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) for Testing Fans for Rating. ibid. 1985.
Construction Manual. ibid. 1995.
The following Manufacturers Standardization Society

E.5 OTHER STANDARDS
of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. document is
available from:
The following American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygienists document is available from: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
American Conference of Governmental Industri- 127 Park Street, N.E.
al Hygienists Vienna, VA 22180–4602
Kemper Woods Center Phone: 703–281–6613
1330 Kemper Meadow Drive Fax: 703–281–6671
Cincinnati, OH 45240
Phone: 513–742–2020
Fax: 513–742–3355 S Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. SP–58, 1993
Edition. Manufacturers Standardization So-
S American Conference of Governmental In- ciety of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.,
dustrial Hygienists. Industrial Ventilation: A Vienna, VA. 1993.
E.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

INDEX
INDEX
A Contact Molding, 5.1, 5.9, 6.1, 7.1, D.3, D.6

Continuous Strand Roving, 2.5, 3.1
Access Openings and End Caps, 7.7
Corrosion Allowance, B.1
Acids, 2.1, 2.2 Corrosion Barrier, 3.1, 3.3, 7.1, A.7, A.9, B.1, D.2,
Air Bubbles, 3.3, 4.7, 7.1 D.5
Air Pollution, 1.1 Corrosion Control, 1.1, 2.5
Alkalies, 2.1, 2.2 Corrosion Resistance, 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 7.7
ANSI/ASME RTP–1, 5.1, E.1 Cut Edges, 7.1, D.2
ANSI/NFPA 91, E.1 Cylindrical Duct (Round Duct), C.1
Antimony Trioxide, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4

Appearance, 3.3, 7.1, 7.9 D
Application, 2.5, 5.9, 6.1, 6.9
Dampers, 7.3, 7.6, 7.7, 9.2, 9.6, 9.7
ASTM, 3.3, 7.1, 7.5, 7.6, 7.8, E.1
Delamination, 3.3, 7.1, D.2
C581, 3.1, 7.1, B.1, E.1
C582, 3.1, 7.9, E.1 Design Requirements, 7.2
D2583, 3.3, 7.9, 8.1, E.1 Dispersion, 2.4
D2584, E.1
D3982, 3.1, 7.9, E.1 DMA, 2.3, 2.4
D638, 5.1, 5.5, 6.1, E.1 Drainage, 2.4, 7.8, 9.2, D.6
D648, D.3
D790, 5.5 Drains, 7.7, 9.7
D883, 7.1, E.1 Dry Spots, 7.1, 7.9
E662, E.1 Duct Hangers and Supports, 7.3
E84, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, D.3, E.1
Durometer, 7.3
B E
Back–draft Dampers, 7.7
Exothermic Reaction, 2.2
Bisphenol A Fumarates, 2.2
Exterior Surface, 3.1, 3.3, 5.11, 7.1
Buried Duct, 7.8
F
C
Fabrication, 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 5.9,
Carbon Veil, 2.5, 3.1 5.10, 6.1, 7.1, 7.9, 8.1, B.1, D.2
Chlorendic Anhydride, 2.1 Field Installation of FRP Duct, 4.1
Chlorine, 2.4 Field Wrapped Joints, 4.1
Chopped Strand Mat, 2.5, 3.1, 7.1, B.1, D.1, D.2, Filament Winding, 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, A.7, D.2
D.3, D.5 Flame Retardant, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, D.2
Clean–up, 4.4 Flange Requirements, 7.2
Cobalt Naphthenate, 2.2, 2.3 Flexible Connections, 7.7, 7.9, 9.7
Cobalt Octoate, 2.2 Foreign Inclusions, 3.3, 7.1
Colloidal Suspension, 2.4 FRP Guide Specifications, 1.2
Color Stability, 2.2 Fume Hoods, 7.6
Composite Material, 1.1, 6.9 Fumed Silicas, 2.4
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition I.1

G Lay–up Procedure, 4.4
Linear Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, 7.7
Gasket Materials, 7.3
Louvers, 7.7, 9.8
Gel Time, 2.3, 2.4, 4.4, D.3
Glycols, 2.1
GRP, 1.1
M
Manufacturer’s Shop Review, 7.8
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), 7.10, 8.2
H Materials, 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 7.1, 7.7, 9.6, D.4
Hand Lay–up, 1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 5.1, 6.1, 7.1, D.1, Mechanical Properties, 2.2, 3.3, 5.1, 5.2, 5.9, 6.2,
D.3 C.1, C.5
Handling, Shipping and Installation, 7.9 MEKP, 2.2, 2.3, 4.4
Hardness, Barcol, 1.1 MYLARR, D.5
Health Concerns, 8.2
High Shear Mixer, 2.4
N
Hot Patch, 4.4, 4.6, D.3
NEXUSR, 2.5, 3.1
Nonconformities, 8.1
I NPG (Neopentyl Glycol), 2.1
Impact Resistance, 2.2
Ingestion, 8.2 O
Inhalation, 8.2
Odor Abatement, 1.1
Initiators, 2.1, 2.2
Opaque, 2.4
Inner Surface, 4.1, 7.1, 7.3
Organic Peroxides, 2.2
Inspection, 2.4, 7.8, 7.9
Interior Layer, 3.1, 7.3, D.1, D.4
Intumescent, 3.1, D.4 P
Paraffin Wax, 3.1, 4.1
J Pimples, 3.3, 7.1

Pinholes, 3.3
Joining Duct, 4.1, 4.4
Polymerized, 2.3
Joints, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5
Q
L Quality Control, 1.2, 3.3, 7.9, 8.1, D.5
Laminate Construction, 1.2, 3.1, 3.3, 5.1, 5.9, 6.2, Resin, Catalyzed, 7.3
7.1, A.1, C.1, C.5
Laminates, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 5.1, 5.2, D.1, E.1
Filament Wound (Type X), 1.2, 2.1, 3.3, 4.1, 5.1,
5.9, 5.10, 5.12, 5.13, 7.1, 7.2, 7.10, A.1, A.3,
R
C.5 Rectangular Duct, 1.1, 6.1, 6.9, 7.2, 7.4, 7.8
Type I, 1.2, 3.1, 5.1, 6.1, 7.1, 7.2, 7.10, A.1, A.2,
C.1 Rectangular Duct Corners, 7.2
Type II, 1.2, 3.1, 5.1, 6.1, 6.9, 7.1, 7.2, 7.10, A.1, Reinforcement, 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.5, 3.1, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2,
A.2, C.1 7.1, 7.2, 7.7, C.1, D.5
I.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Release Film, D.5 Synergist (Antimony Trioxide), 2.1, 2.4, 7.1
Requirements, 1.1, 1.2, 3.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.9
Resin, 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 6.1, 8.3, D.5
Catalyzed, 1.2, 2.1, B.1
T
Chlorendic, 2.1 Tack Weld, 4.4
Halogenated, 2.4
Isophthalic, 2.1 Tensile Elongation, 2.2
Othophthalic, 2.1 Terminology, 1.2, 7.1
Polyester, 2.2
Thermoplastic, 1.1, 2.1, 7.7, B.1, D.6, E.2
Thermosetting (or Thermoset), B.1, E.1
Thermoset Plastic, 1.1, 1.2, D.6, E.1
Rotating Mandrel, D.2
Thixed, 2.2, 2.4
Round (Cylindrical) Duct, A.1, C.1, C.5
Thixotropes, 2.4
RTP (Also see FRP and GRP), 1.1, 1.2, D.6, E.1
Tolerances, 4.1, 7.8
Translucent, 2.4
S
Safety, 1.2, 2.4, 3.3, 4.4, 5.1, 7.6, 7.7, 7.9, 8.2
U
Safety Factor, 1.2, 5.9, C.1
Safety Solvent, 4.4, 8.3 Uses, 1.1
Scope, 1.1 UV (Ultraviolet), 2.5, 3.1, D.6

UV Stabilizer, 2.5
Secondary Bonding, 3.3, 4.1
Serrated Roller, 4.1, D.6
Solvents, 2.1, 2.2, 7.10 V
Spray–chop, 2.5
Ventilators, 7.7, 9.8
Sprinklers, 7.8
Vinyl Ester, 1.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, D.1, D.6
Standard Elbows and Mitered Joints, 7.3
Viscosity, 2.2, 8.2, D.2
Static Electricity, 3.1, 7.1
Volume Dampers, 7.6, 9.6
Stiffeners, 1.2, 6.1, 6.9, A.5
Storage, 7.1, 8.3
Structural Layer, 1.1, 2.5, 3.1, 3.3, D.6 W
Styrene, 4.1, 8.2, 8.3 Weatherability, 2.2
Surface Hardness, 3.3, 7.1 What is FRP, 1.1
Surfacing Veil, 2.5, D.6 Woven Roving, 2.5, 3.1, 5.11, 7.1, 7.7, D.2, D.3, D.7
Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition I.3

I.4 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition


Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THERMOSET FRP

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS’

FIRST EDITION -- JUNE, 1997

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS’

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS’

4201 Lafayette Center Drive

Printed in the U.S.A.

FIRST EDITION -- JUNE, 1997

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS’

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition iii

Joseph J. Flannagan, Jr. G. A. Navas, Staff

Dr. Frank A. Cassis Joseph M. Plecnik, PhD, P.E.

Robert M. Hahn Robert C. Talbot

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition iv

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition v

vi Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

FRP TASK FORCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

NOTICE TO USERS OF THIS PUBLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

CHAPTER 2 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1

CHAPTER 3 LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1

CHAPTER 4 FIELD JOINING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition vii

CHAPTER 5 DESIGN OF ROUND FRP DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1

CHAPTER 6 DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR FRP DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1

CHAPTER 7 REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1

viii Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

CHAPTER 8 QUALITY CONTROL AND SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1

CHAPTER 9 FRP GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1

APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT OF THE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1

APPENDIX B CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF FRP DUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1

APPENDIX C ALTERNATE ROUND DUCT DESIGN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1

APPENDIX D GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1

APPENDIX E REFERENCED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition ix

x Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition xi

xii Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition xiii

1.1 SCOPE layer of continuous fiber strands wrapped around a ro-

While both types of plastics find application through-

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition 1.1

CHAPTER 1, INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 9, FRP GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS

The introduction outlines the format and layout of the

CHAPTER 2, MATERIALS APPENDIX A, DEVELOPMENT OF THE

CHAPTER 3, LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION APPENDIX B, CHEMICAL RESISTANCE OF

1.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.2.1 Orthophthalic Resins

Orthophthalic resins are generally referred to as gener-

2.2 THERMOSET RESINS 2.2.3 Chlorendic Resins

Chlorendic resins are unsaturated, halogenated poly-

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition 2.1

For room temperature (RT) cure systems, catalysts,

2.2 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition 2.3

2.4 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

S continuous strand roving (filament winding) 2.8.3 Woven Roving

2.8.1 Surfacing Veil

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition 2.5

2.6 Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition

Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual  First Edition 3.1

ALL CHOPPED OR 1–1/2 oz/ft2

FIGURE 3--1 LAY–UP SEQUENCE FOR FRP DUCT –